20_LA_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
2020 DODGE CHALLENGER OWNER’S MANUAL
©2019 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
2020 DODGE CHALLENGER
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Dodge brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 10
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................67
4 SAFETY ...........................................................................................................................................92
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................146
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................194
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................234
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 287
9 MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................301
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................369
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 373
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL.................................. 8
Essential Information .................................... 8
Symbols .......................................................... 8
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................. 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............10
KEYS ......................................................................11
Key Fob......................................................... 11
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................16
Keyless Push Button Ignition ...................... 16
Vehicle On Message ................................... 17
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................18
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped ... 18
Remote Start Abort Message On The
Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped.. 19
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 19
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle .................................................. 19
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle .......................................................... 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 20
General Information .................................... 20
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................20
Key Programming ....................................... 21
Replacement Keys ..................................... 21
General Information .................................... 22
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .. 22
To Arm The System...................................... 22
To Disarm The System ................................ 23
Rearming Of The System............................. 23
Tamper Alert................................................. 23
DOORS .................................................................. 23
Manual Door Locks...................................... 23
Power Door Locks ....................................... 24
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry........... 24
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ............... 27
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ....... 28
SEATS ................................................................ 28
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 28
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 29
Power Seats — If Equipped ......................... 30
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 30
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped......... 31
Vehicles Without Passenger
Seating Installed.......................................... 32
Passenger Seat Easy Entry ...................... 33
HEAD RESTRAINTS .......................................... 33
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats 33
Rear Head Restraints.................................. 34
Vehicles Without Passenger Seating
Installed........................................................ 34
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 35
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped ................................................ 35
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped ................................................... 36
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 36
MIRRORS ..............................................................37
Automatic Dimming Mirror.......................... 37
Outside Mirrors .......................................... 37
Power Mirrors ............................................. 38
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ................... 38
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 38
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..............................................39
Headlight Switch ........................................ 39
Multifunction Lever ................................... 39
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ................................................. 39
High/Low Beam Switch ............................. 39
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped ................................. 39
Flash-To-Pass ............................................. 40
Automatic Headlights ................................. 40
Parking Lights ............................................. 40
Headlights On With Wipers ......................... 40
Headlight Time Delay ................................. 40
Lights-On Reminder .................................... 41
Fog Lights — If Equipped ........................... 41
Turn Signals .............................................. 41
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 41
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................41
Map/Reading Lights ................................... 42
Ambient Light — If Equipped....................... 42
Dimmer Controls ........................................ 42
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ............43
Wiper Operation........................................... 43
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......... 44
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................44
Automatic Climate Control Overview .........45
Climate Control Functions...........................51
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......51
Operating Tips ............................................. 52
WINDOWS ............................................................53
Power Window Controls............................... 53
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 54
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..................54
Opening Sunroof.......................................... 55
Closing Sunroof............................................ 55
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 55
Sunshade Operation.................................... 55
Pinch Protect Feature..................................55
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 56
Ignition Off Operation ..................................56
HOOD ..................................................................56
To Open The Hood .................................... 56
To Close The Hood....................................... 56
TRUNK ................................................................57
Opening ........................................................ 57
Closing.......................................................... 58
Trunk Safety .................................................58
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ........58
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® .................................................. 59
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 60
Using HomeLink®........................................61
Security......................................................... 61
Troubleshooting Tips ................................... 62
General Information .................................... 62
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........................................ 63
Storage ......................................................... 63
Cupholders................................................... 64
Electrical Power Outlets ............................ 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...................................... 67
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 69
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .............................. 70
SRT Instrument Cluster Descriptions......... 72
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 72
Location And Controls ................................. 73
Engine Oil Life Reset ................................. 74
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) —
If Equipped................................................... 75
Instrument Cluster Display
Selectable Menu Items ............................... 75
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions
— If Equipped ............................................ 80
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.................. 81
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 81
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 84
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 88
Green Indicator Lights................................. 88
White Indicator Lights ................................. 88
Blue Indicator Lights.................................... 89
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ...... 89
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ............................................... 90
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS .........................................................90
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...............................................92
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 92
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..... 93
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...........................99
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped................................................... 99
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Operation - If Equipped .............................104
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) .........................................106
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 110
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...110
Important Safety Precautions...................110
Seat Belt Systems ....................................111
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...120
Child Restraints ........................................128
Transporting Pets ...................................142
SAFETY TIPS .................................................... 142
Transporting Passengers ..........................142
Exhaust Gas ...........................................142
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................143
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................144
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................................. 146
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........146
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....146
Normal Starting ......................................147
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) ......................................................149
If Engine Fails To Start ............................149
After Starting..............................................150
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 150
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
3.6L & 5.7L ....................................................... 150
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
6.2L & 6.4L ........................................................ 150
PARKING BRAKE ............................................. 151
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ... 153
Six-Speed Manual Transmission ..............153
Shifting .......................................................153
Recommended Shift Speeds ....................154
1–4 Skip Shift ...........................................155
Downshifting ..............................................155
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED 155
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................156
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System .......................................................156
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission.......157
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL ............................................................ 163
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED.........................................163
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ...........................163
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ...................164
To Activate ................................................164
To Set A Desired Speed ............................164
To Vary The Speed Setting .......................165
To Accelerate For Passing ........................165
To Resume Speed ....................................166
To Deactivate ............................................166
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................166
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operation....................................................168
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)...........................................................168
To Activate/Deactivate..............................168
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................169
To Cancel....................................................169
To Turn Off..................................................169
To Resume .................................................169
To Vary The Speed Setting........................170
Setting The Following Distance In ACC.....171
Overtake Aid...............................................172
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........172
Display Warnings And Maintenance ........173
Precautions While Driving With ACC.........174
General Information ..................................176
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode...........................................................176
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ..................................................... 178
ParkSense Sensors ...................................178
ParkSense Warning Display......................178
ParkSense Display.....................................179
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........180
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................181
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............181
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....181
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........... 182
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ............................... 183
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message.................184
VEHICLE LOADING .......................................... 184
Vehicle Certification Label ......................184
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......185
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ...........185
Overloading................................................185
Loading ....................................................185
TRAILER TOWING ............................................. 185
Common Towing Definitions.....................186
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................187
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .......................................188
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................188
Towing Requirements ...............................189
Towing Tips ...............................................191
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ......................................... 192
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 192
Driving On Slippery Surfaces.....................192
Driving Through Water ..............................193
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................... 194
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 194
General Information ..................................198
BULB REPLACEMENT ...................................... 199
Replacement Bulbs ...............................199
Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................200
FUSES.................................................................. 202
General Information ..................................202
Underhood Fuses.......................................203
Rear Interior Fuses ....................................206
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING........................ 210
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage ..........210
Preparations For Jacking .........................211
Jacking And Changing A Tire ....................211
Road Tire Installation ................................215
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED................... 215
Tire Service Kit Storage.............................216
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation....................................................216
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........217
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit...........218
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...................221
Tire Service Kit Storage.............................221
Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation....................................................222
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........222
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit ..........224
JUMP STARTING ................................................227
Preparations For Jump Start.....................227
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................228
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................229
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION .................................................230
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..........................231
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................232
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models..............233
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .................................................................233
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .......................233
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ..................................234
3.6L And 5.7L Engines .............................234
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engines ...239
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................ 245
3.6L Engine ...............................................245
5.7L Engine ...............................................246
6.2L Supercharged Engine ......................247
6.4L Engine ...............................................248
Checking Oil Level —
3.6L And 5.7L Engine................................249
Checking Oil Level — 6.2L Supercharged
Engine And 6.4L Engine ...........................249
Adding Washer Fluid ...............................249
Maintenance-Free Battery ......................250
Pressure Washing......................................250
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 250
Engine Oil ..................................................251
Engine Oil Filter ........................................253
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .........................254
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................254
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............256
Body Lubrication ......................................257
Windshield Wiper Blades ........................257
Exhaust System .........................................258
Cooling System ........................................260
Brake System ............................................263
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual
Transmission (If Equipped) .......................264
Manual Transmission — If Equipped........264
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped....264
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped .......265
Rear Axle ....................................................265
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
RAISING THE VEHICLE .................................... 266
TIRES ................................................................... 266
Tire Safety Information ...........................266
Tires — General Information .....................273
Tire Types ...................................................277
Spare Tires — If Equipped .......................278
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..................279
Tire Chains And Traction Devices —
Non-SRT ....................................................280
Tire Chains And Traction Devices —
SRT .............................................................281
Tire Rotation Recommendations —
Non-SRT .....................................................281
Tire Rotation Recommendations — SRT ..282
Tire Rotation—Different Tire Size On
Front And Rear Axle ...................................282
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 282
Treadwear ..................................................283
Traction Grades .........................................283
Temperature Grades .................................283
VEHICLE STORAGE .......................................... 283
BODYWORK........................................................ 284
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .....284
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........284
Preserving The Bodywork..........................284
INTERIORS ......................................................... 285
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................285
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................286
Leather Parts .............................................286
Glass Surfaces ..........................................286
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA.......................................287
Vehicle Identification Number ..................287
BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................287
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS 287
Torque Specifications................................288
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ....................................289
3.6L Engine................................................289
5.7L Engine (With Automatic
Transmission) ............................................289
5.7L Engine (With Manual
Transmission) ............................................289
6.2L Supercharged Engine .......................290
6.4L Engine................................................290
Reformulated Gasoline ........................290
Materials Added To Fuel .........................290
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................291
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex
Fuel Vehicles..............................................291
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...291
MMT In Gasoline........................................291
Fuel System Cautions................................292
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ....................292
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT ....................293
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT ................................294
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT ..........295
Engine ........................................................295
Chassis ...................................................297
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT ...................298
Engine .......................................................298
Chassis ..................................................300
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 301
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 301
UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................................... 302
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings ..................................302
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings ................317
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION .......... 333
Safety Guidelines.......................................333
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY .............. 334
Introduction................................................334
Radio Mode................................................335
Media Mode...............................................342
Phone Mode...............................................350
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ..................................................... 361
Radio Operation.........................................361
Media Mode...............................................361
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 361
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ............................................................ 362
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........362
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS 363
Introducing Uconnect ................................363
Get Started.................................................364
Basic Voice Commands ............................364
Radio ..........................................................364
Media .........................................................364
Phone .........................................................365
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped .................365
Climate .......................................................366
Navigation (4C NAV) ..................................366
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped ..................366
Do Not Disturb ..........................................366
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...................367
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped .................367
General Information ..................................368
Additional Information...............................368
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 369
Prepare For The Appointment...................369
Prepare A List.............................................369
Be Reasonable With Requests .................369
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................369
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................369
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........370
In Mexico Contact ......................................370
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............370
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................370
Service Contract .......................................370
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............................371
MOPAR PARTS ...................................................371
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 371
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................371
In Canada...................................................371
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 371
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle.
Be assured that it represents precision work-
manship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation
and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple-
mented by Warranty Information, and
customer-oriented documents. Within this infor-
mation, you will find a description of the
services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage,
and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to
read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following
the instructions, recommendations, tips, and
important warnings in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of
this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated
to specific markets or versions are not expressly
indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only
consider the information which is related to the
trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout
the Owner's Information, that may or may not be
applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with
the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US
LLC aims at a constant improvement of the
vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that an
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine
which section contains the information you
desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's
Manual contains a complete listing of all
subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be
observed when using this component. Refer to
“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
INTRODUCTION 9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result
in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also
contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when
using “Track-Use” parts and equipment:
NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on
public roads. FCA US LLC does not autho-
rize the use of “Track-Use” equipment on
public roads.
The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for
race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver, engi-
neers should supervise the installation of
“Track-Use” parts.
FCA US LLC does not authorize the installa-
tion or use of any part noted as “Track-Use”
on any new vehicle prior to its first retail
sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip-
ment before driving on public roads.
ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat
belts when driving on public roads.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display the message “Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion”.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for play-
back. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in
real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it
to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
KEYS
Key Fob
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and trunk from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need
to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE:
SRT vehicles, equipped with the 6.2L Super-
charged engine, come with three key fobs (two
red and one black) that allow for different
engine power levels.
Key Fob
The key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
Emergency Key
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the
key fob become depleted. The emergency key is
also for locking/unlocking the glove compart-
ment. You can keep the emergency key with you
when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the
mechanical release button on the back of the
key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull
the key out with your other hand.
1 — Trunk Open
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
5 — PANIC Button
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Key Removal Process
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system
will also be activated.
NOTE:
All door unlock settings can be programmed to
your convenience through Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Unlock the driver door on the first push of the
key fob unlock button.
Unlock all doors on the first push of the key
fob unlock button.
NOTE:
To unlock doors and trunk with passive entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the
courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach
lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will
turn on. Refer to “Interior Lights” in this chapter
for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's door or all doors on
the first push of the unlock button on the key
fob.
To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to
flash when the doors are locked with the key
fob. This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to
90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with
the key fob. The time for this feature is program-
mable, on vehicles equipped, through Uconnect
Settings. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the trunk button on the key fob two times
within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
1 — Mechanical Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
To Lock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal if programmed.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further programmable information.
NOTE:
To lock the doors with passive entry, Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Doors”
in this chapter for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
automatically if the key fob is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push
the Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic
Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights
will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes
unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic
button a second time or drive the vehicle at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the
exterior lights and horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m)
from the vehicle when using the key fob to
turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio
frequency noises emitted by the system.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and then pull
the emergency key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of
the emergency key, a #2 flat blade screw-
driver, or a coin and gently pry the two
halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
NOTE:
Separating the case can also be done with the
emergency key or a flat head screwdriver.
Separating Case With Emergency Key
Separating Case With A Flat Blade Screwdriver
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar surface, and then replace
the battery. When replacing the battery,
match the (+) sign on the battery to the (+)
sign on the inside of the battery clip, located
on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers because skin oils
may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the igni-
tion with the push of a button as long as the key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four oper-
ating positions, three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth
position is START. During START, RUN will illumi-
nate.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
(Continued)
ON/RUN
Driving position.
All the electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (engine not running), a
chime will sound to remind you to place the igni-
tion in the OFF position.
In addition to the chime, the Vehicle On
message will display in the cluster (if equipped).
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof
(if equipped) will remain active for three
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking
brake, place the engine in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped
Push remote start button on the key
fob twice within five seconds. Pushing
the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started with the key after
two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Remote Start Abort Message On The
Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the remote start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then,
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain
in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times with the key fob. However, the ignition
must be cycled by pushing the START/STOP
ignition button twice (or the ignition switch
must be placed in the ON/RUN position)
before you can repeat the start sequence for
a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid remote start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle secu-
rity alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of
the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button. If the START/STOP
ignition button is not present, insert the key fob
into the ignition switch and place the switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Insert Key
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
and Turn To Run” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you insert the key.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
To Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the
following occur:
The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds
2500 rpm.
Any engine warning lights come on.
Low Fuel Light turns on.
The hood is opened.
The hazard switch is pushed.
The gear selector is moved out of PARK.
The brake pedal is pushed.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features
will automatically turn on in cold weather. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature
will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated. These features will stay on through
the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There-
fore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob
obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the keyless
push button ignition for unauthorized operation.
While the vehicle security alarm is armed, inte-
rior switches for door locks and trunk release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm,
the vehicle security alarm will provide the
following audible and visible signals: the horn
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals
will flash, and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Refer to "Ignition
Switch" in this chapter for further informa-
tion.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in “Doors” in this chapter
for further information).
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry Door Handle, if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry,” in “Doors” in this chapter for
further information.
Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button
(requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create condi-
tions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm
the vehicle security alarm.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five seconds
between cycles, up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active and the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the vehicle security
alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three
times when you disarm the vehicle security
alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on
each door trim panel downward. To unlock each
door, pull the door lock knob on each door trim
panel upward.
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the
door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure
the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each
door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock
the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with
the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
this section for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is on, and either door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Turning off the ignition or closing the door will
allow the locks to operate. If a door is open with
the ignition either placed in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) position, a chime will
sound as a reminder.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off;
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or the
manual transmission into FIRST gear or
REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the
vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors, and lock your
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key from the ignition and lock your
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause severe personal injuries
and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm
the security alarm.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver's door automat-
ically. The interior door panel lock knob will
raise when the door is unlocked.
Upon unlocking the door with Passive Entry, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the low beams,
license plate lamp, and position lamps can be
set to illuminate for 0, 30 (default), 60, or
90 seconds.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock both doors
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry
vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, and it does not find any Passive
Entry key fobs outside the car, the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
To Enter The Trunk:
With a Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the deck lid, push the button located on the
center of the light bar which is located on the
deck lid above the license plate.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch,
unless another one of the vehicle’s Passive
Entry key fobs is outside the vehicle and within
5 ft (1.5 m) of the deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, push the door handle lock
button to lock both doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h) and the trans-
mission is placed in PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the
seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once the seat is in the desired position. Using
body pressure, move forward and rearward on
the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Adjusting Bar Location
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
Manual Front Seat Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Lever
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
provide additional storage area. Pull on the
loops located on the upper part of the rear seat-
back to fold down either or both seatbacks.
These loops can be tucked away when not in
use.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and, by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
Folding Rear Seatback Loop
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright posi-
tion, make sure it is latched by strongly pulling
on the top of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position, the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the front seat cushions. The
power seat switches are used to control the
position of the seat.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rear-
ward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward.
The seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch; the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase
or decrease the lumbar support. Push the
switch upward or downward to raise or lower the
lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cush-
ions and seat backs.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured
in a collision. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreen
buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two
indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, and one
for LO. Turning the heating elements off will
return the user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the display will change from HI to LO,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn off automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats,
the seat cushion and seat back will have fans
that draw the air from the passenger compart-
ment and move air through fine perforations in
the seat cover to help keep the driver and front
passenger cooler in higher ambient tempera-
tures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and
LO.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Vehicles Without Passenger Seating
Installed
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must
be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System
and Head Restraint for the safety of the
passenger. If the passenger and/or rear seats
have been removed, do not ride in those areas.
This vehicle has been designed to maximize
total performance. In doing so, the deletion of
passenger seats and/or rear seat may affect
the NVH (Noise, Vibration, and Harshness) char-
acteristics. As a result, the interior will be louder
overall.
WARNING!
If the passenger and/or rear seats have
been removed, do not ride in those areas.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
If this vehicle was not factory equipped with
a passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install
a passenger seat because the safety
systems, including the air bags and seat-
belt, may not properly protect you.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in this area are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
Only ride in available seating positions
equipped with seat belt systems. Always
properly wear your seat belt. Failure to do
so could result in an increased risk of
serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating positions to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat if the head restraints are not in place
of their proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever
located on the side of the seatback in order to
dump the seatback and slide the seat forward.
You can also temporarily remove the seat belt
from the guide loop on the seat and allow the
seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows for
easier access to the rear seat. To return the
seat to a normal seating position, first return
the seatback to its original recline location and
then slide the entire seat back to the pre-set
lock position.
Easy Entry Lever
NOTE:
The front passenger seat needs to slide back
to a pre-set position for the fore-aft adjuster
to be properly locked. For example, if the
front passenger has the seat adjusted full
rear and exits the vehicle to let a rear
passenger enter using the easy entry handle,
the fore-aft adjuster needs to slide back
about 2/3 of the way rearward to hit the lock
position. If the adjuster is not returned to this
pre-set position, the seat will appear to be
loose.
Also, if the front passenger uses the easy
entry handle and then lifts up the recliner
handle without moving the seat back to its
original pre-set position, the recliner will not
lock until it is moved to the full recline posi-
tion.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are
equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).
In the event of a rear impact, the RHR will auto-
matically extend forward minimizing the gap
between the back of the occupants head and
the RHR.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
The RHR will automatically return to their
normal position following a rear impact. If the
RHR do not return to their normal position, see
an authorized dealer immediately.
Head Restraint
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located at the base
of the head restraint and push downward on the
head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat
belt from the seat belt loop. Raise the head
restraint as far as it can go. Then, push the
adjustment button and the release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put
the head restraint posts into the holes while
pushing the adjustment button and release
button. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to recline the front seat
before removing the head restraint to provide
enough clearance from the roof.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints are
non-adjustable and are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact.
Vehicles Without Passenger Seating
Installed
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must
be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System
and Head Restraint for the safety of the
passenger. If the passenger and/or rear seats
have been removed, do not ride in those areas.
This vehicle has been designed to maximize
total performance. In doing so, the deletion of
passenger seats and/or rear seat may affect
the NVH (Noise, Vibration, and Harshness) char-
acteristics. As a result, the interior will be louder
overall.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3 — Seat Belt Loop
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Do not place items over the top of the Reac-
tive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of
a collision and could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column —
If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position,
push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
If the passenger and/or rear seats have
been removed, do not ride in those areas.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
If this vehicle was not factory equipped with
a passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install
a passenger seat because the safety
systems, including the air bags and seat-
belt, may not properly protect you.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in this area are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
Only ride in available seating positions
equipped with seat belt systems. Always
properly wear your seat belt. Failure to do
so could result in an increased risk of
serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating positions to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat if the head restraints are not in place
of their proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — If
Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column switch is
located below the multifunction switch on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up
or down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the switch toward you or
push the switch away from you as desired.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. This time will vary based on envi-
ronmental temperatures. The heated steering
wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Press the mirror dimmer button once to turn
the feature on. The soft key button will illumi-
nate when activated.
Press the mirror dimmer button a second
time to turn the feature off, and the soft key
button will no longer be illuminated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
and a slight overlap of the view obtained from
the inside mirror.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and espe-
cially of the lane next to your vehicle.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L
(left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the select button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be
adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this chapter for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down-
ward and swing the mirror cover upward. The
light turns on automatically. Close the mirror
cover to turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun
visor, rotate the sun visor downward and swing
the sun visor so it is parallel to the side window,
pull the sun visor rearwards until it is in the
desired position. To use the extender feature of
the sun visor, grab the extender which is located
at the rear of the visor and pull rearward.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
1 — Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Adjustment
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, instrument panel light
dimming, interior lights and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light opera-
tion. Push the switch to enable fog lights (if
equipped).
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the turn signals, headlight beam selection
and passing lights. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when
the engine is started and will remain on unless
the headlamps are turned to the on position,
the parking brake is applied, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter
Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle the high beam lever
six full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
placing the ignition in the ON position. The
system will return to the default setting upon
placing the ignition in the OFF position.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
a local authorized dealer.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your head-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward you. This will turn on the high beam
headlights until the lever is released.
NOTE:
If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the
high beams will shut off.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When
the system is on, the headlight time delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. The headlight
time delay can be programmed 0/30/60/90
seconds.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
To turn the automatic system off, move the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first
detent to turn the parking lights on. This also
turns on all instrument panel lighting.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will
turn on after the wipers are turned on if the
headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position
and the programmable feature is set to on. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the
wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE:
The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illu-
mination for up to 90 seconds when leaving
your vehicle in an unlit area with the headlight
switch in the O (off) position.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
in the OFF position while the headlights are still
on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45
seconds. The delay interval begins when the
headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to acti-
vate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the
delay.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The Headlight Time Delay is programmable
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a
chime will sound to alert the driver when the
driver's door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the front
fog lights, either push the headlight switch a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
display illuminates when the fog lights are
turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However,
selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation of
the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior lights come on when a door is
opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are
on because a door is open. The Battery Protec-
tion also includes the glove compartment light
and the trunk light. To restore interior light oper-
ation after automatic battery protection is
enabled (lights off), either place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun
visors on the overhead console. Each light is
turned on by pushing the lens. Push the lens a
second time to turn off the light. These lights
also turn on when a door is opened, when the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry key
fob is pushed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Map/Reading Lights
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light casts illumina-
tion for improved visibility of the floor and
center console area.
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the bright-
ness of the door handle lights, map pocket
lights, and ambient light located in the over-
head console.
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight
switch and is located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the left dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights and
lighted cupholders (if equipped).
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward
to the second detent to turn on the interior
lights. The interior lights will remain on when the
dimmer control is in this position.
Interior Light Defeat (Off)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to
the extreme bottom (O) off position. The interior
lights will remain off when the doors are open.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature
brightens all text displays such as the odom-
eter, instrument cluster display, and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed
in the ACC or ON/RUN position. The multifunc-
tion lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
first detent, past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation, or to the second
detent past the intermittent settings for
high-speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to
the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are four delay settings, which
allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a
minimum of one cycle every second to a
maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever
inward (toward the steering column) and hold it
for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield
wiper control is in the delay range, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing
the lever and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield
wiper is turned off, the wipers will operate for
three wipe cycles and then turn off.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the
wiper control is left in any position other
than off.
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine.
If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the off position. If the wind-
shield wiper control is turned off and the
blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the
MIST position to activate a single wipe cycle to
clear off road mist or spray from a passing
vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until
you release the multifunction lever.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the wind-
shield and automatically activates the wipers
for the driver. The feature is especially useful for
road splash or overspray from the windshield
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of four settings to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay posi-
tion 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3
should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be
used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place
the wiper switch in the off position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE:
Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regu-
late the temperature, air flow, and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
NOTE:
Interior trims may vary. Depending on the engine equipped in the vehicle, there may be a “DRAG”, “Drive Mode”, or “SRT” button in place of a “Sport”
button on the instrument panel.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing and releasing the button again will cause the MAX A/C
operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used
in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically
adjusting the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and
release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator
illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Icon Description
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The Sync button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting, and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change that airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air condi-
tioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manu-
ally adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and auto-
matically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
SRT Storage
SRT models include a Storage Mode feature to
prevent battery drain while parked for long
durations. The vehicle can be put into Storage
Mode through the info menu in the instrument
cluster display by selecting “Enter Storage
Mode”.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on the
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door window. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect
system, the power window switches will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn
on and set the mode
control to the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to and turn on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and, in some models, passenger
power window switches have an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch to the first detent and release it when
you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second, the sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop at full open posi-
tion. During Express Open operation, any other
actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
sunroof in a partially open position.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch rearward, the sunroof
and sunshade will open and automatically stop
at full open position. Releasing the switch while
the sunroof is in motion will stop the sunroof in
a partially open position.
Vent Open
Push and release the Vent switch within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. During Express Vent operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunroof operation.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close auto-
matically from any position. During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the
sunroof switches will stop the sunroof in a
partially open position.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunroof will close from any position and stop at
a full closed position. Releasing the switch while
the sunroof is in motion will stop the sunroof in
a partially open position.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, then open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automati-
cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
The power sunroof switch can remain active
in Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is
placed to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
This feature is programmable using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
the left side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the
safety catch is located under the center
front edge of the hood.
Hood Safety Catch Location
3. Push the safety catch to the left.
Hood Safety Catch
To Close The Hood
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
TRUNK
Opening
The trunk can be opened from inside the vehicle
using the power trunk button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
wheel.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the
vehicle by pushing the trunk button on the key
fob twice within five seconds or by using the
external release switch located on the under-
side of the decklid overhang. The release
feature will function only when the vehicle is in
the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
trunk open symbol will display in the instrument
cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The
odometer display will reappear once the trunk is
closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the trunk
open symbol will display until the trunk is
closed.
NOTE:
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
”Doors” in this chapter for further information
on trunk operation with the Passive Entry
feature.
Opening From Inside The Vehicle
Interior Power Trunk Release
The trunk can be opened from inside
the vehicle using the power trunk
release button located on the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering
wheel.
NOTE:
The automatic transmission must be in PARK
before the button will operate. For manual
transmissions, the vehicle must be in NEUTRAL.
Opening From Outside The Vehicle
To Unlock/Open The Trunk
The trunk may be unlocked/opened using
either of the following methods:
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Passive Entry Button
Key Fob Trunk Release Button
Push the power trunk button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to
release the trunk.
Passive Entry Button
Push the trunk passive entry button which is
located on the back of the trunk lid. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
trunk, push the passive entry button to open the
trunk.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
With one or more hands placed on the outside
trunk surface push the trunk lid down until you
hear the trunk lock latch into place.
NOTE:
Before closing the trunk lid make sure your key
fob isn’t inside the trunk area. The trunk will
latch then automatically unlock if the key fob is
sensed, not allowing the key fob to be locked in
the trunk area.
Trunk Safety
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emer-
gency release lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being
locked inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened
by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle
attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Release
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console designate the three different
HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indi-
cator is located on the left side of the first
button.
HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the
trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from
outside, or through the inside of the vehicle.
Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is
unattended. Once in the trunk, young children
may not be able to escape, even if they
entered through the rear seat. If trapped in
the trunk, children can die from suffocation
or heat stroke.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that
were manufactured after 1995. These garage
door openers can be identified by the “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. On the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device acti-
vates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers manu-
factured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you press and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed Home-
Link® button and observe the indicator
light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step
2 and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are program-
ming.
5. Press and hold the programmed Home-
Link® button and observe the indicator
light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the Home-
Link® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indi-
cator flashes. Note that all channels will be
erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming Home-
Link®, here are some of the most common solu-
tions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a Rolling
Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Glove Compartment
Opened Glove Compartment
Console Storage
The center console has a storage compartment
located underneath the armrest. The compart-
ment contains a 12 Volt power outlet, and is
also equipped with a USB port featuring active
charging, which will continue charging your
device up to 60 minutes after the ignition is
turned off. The USB port also may be equipped
with an IPOD®/USB control, or Apple CarPlay®
and Android Auto™. Refer to “IPOD®/USB/MP3
Control – If Equipped” in “Multimedia” for
further information. If equipped with Apple
CarPlay® and Android Auto™, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Center Console
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center
console and in the door panels.
Front Cupholders
Door Cupholder
The rear seat cupholders are located in the
center armrest between the rear seats. The
cupholders are positioned forward in the
armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient
access to beverage cans or bottles while main-
taining a resting place for the rear occupant's
elbows.
Rear Cupholders
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” can
be powered when the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled with
a “battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
These power outlets can also operate a conven-
tional cigar lighter unit.
The front power outlet is located next to the
storage area on the integrated center stack of
the instrument panel.
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are place in the
cupholder, they can spill when the door is
closed, burning the occupants. Be careful
when closing the doors to avoid injury.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
The front integrated center stack power
outlet can be changed from switched “igni-
tion” to constant “battery” powered by
moving the integrated center stack fuse
#12 in the Rear Power Distribution Center
from fuse location “IGN” to “B+.” Refer to
“Fuses” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
In addition to the front center stack power
outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the
center console to the left of the media hub.
Power Outlet — Center Console
NOTE:
All accessories connected to these powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when
the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery
against discharge.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated
Center Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center
Console
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
(Continued)
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L or 5.7L Engine
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L Engine
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see “Servicing And
Maintenance.” Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster For 6.2L Supercharged Engine
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
Instrument Cluster For 6.2L Supercharged High Output Engine
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRT Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful infor-
mation to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF
mode, opening/closing of a door will activate
the display for viewing, and display the total
miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads greater than 230°F
(110°C) pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains above 230°F
(110°C), turn the engine off immediately and
call an authorized dealer for service.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features an inter-
active display which is located in the instrument
cluster.
SRT Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display
This system conveniently allows the driver to
select a variety of useful information by pushing
the arrow buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel. The instrument cluster display
menu items consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Performance
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Diagnostics — If Equipped
Speed Warning — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select informa-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrows allows you
to cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
Main menu item.
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
Holding the up or down or left or
right arrow button will loop the user
through the currently selected menu or
options presented on the screen.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last
submenu screen viewed within that main
menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or
km/h).
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and
submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the up and
down arrows will allow the user to select
the item of interest.
Pushing the OK button makes the selection
and a confirmation screen will appear
(returning the user to the first page of the
submenu).
Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and
Performance Timers) — If Equipped:
Information is reset by pushing and holding
the OK button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instru-
ment cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK or arrow
buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled mainte-
nance), refer to the following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure(s):
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life.
If conditions are met, the gauge and
numeric display will update to show 100%.
If conditions are not met a popup message
of "To reset oil life engine must be off with
ignition in run” will be displayed (for five
seconds), and the user will remain at the Oil
Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down
arrow button to return to previous main
menu.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — If
Equipped
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled
on vehicles with manual transmission, or when
a vehicle with automatic transmission is in
manual shift mode. The PSI provides the driver
with a visual indication within the instrument
cluster display when the driver configured gear
shift point has been reached and the driver is
still accelerating. This indication notifies the
driver to change gear corresponding to the
configured RPMs in the head unit.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu
Items
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired Selectable Menu item is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as
desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to toggle units (km/h or
mph) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the “Vehicle Info” menu is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right or left arrow button to
scroll through the submenus items of “Vehicle
Info.” Follow the directional prompts to access
or reset any of the following “Vehicle Info”
submenu items:
Tire Pressure Monitor
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON
is displayed with tire pressure values in each
corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON
and the tire pressure values in each corner of
the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire
are displayed in a different color than the other
tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and
cannot be reset. Refer to “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS)” under “Safety” for
further information.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Trans Temp
Displays the actual transmission tempera-
ture.
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK
button. The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will
be displayed at all times, but the following
conditions will need to be met in order to reset
Oil Life:
The vehicle must be off
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the OK button
will reset the gauge and the numeric display will
return to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a popup message
will display for 5 seconds, describing the
required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen
will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Storage Mode
Through this option, the vehicle can be
placed into Storage Mode. Refer to
“Vehicle Storage” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for further information.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Status — If Equipped
Displays the status of the All - Wheel Drive
system.
Intake Air Temp — If Equipped
Displays the current temperature of the air
entering the engine.
Engine Torque — If Equipped
Displays the current engine torque.
Engine Power — If Equipped
Displays the current engine power.
Air-Fuel Ratio — If Equipped
Displays the air-fuel ratio.
Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Displays the current boost pressure.
InterCooler (I/C) Temp — If Equipped
Displays the current InterCooler (I/C)
temperature.
Performance Features
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for
off-highway or track use only and should not
be done on any public roadways. It is
recommended that these features be used in
a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which can jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Performance menu is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push the right
or left arrow button to enter the
submenus.
The Performance Features include the
following:
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Timer
Braking Distance
Distance
From Speed
Current G-Forces
Peak G-Forces
Lap Timer
Lap History
Will list the last five laps with the best lap
highlighted in green.
Top Speed
The following describes each feature and its
operation:
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
ON/OFF button (located on the steering wheel)
until one of the following displays in the instru-
ment cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
If the Driver Assist main menu is not selected,
an ACC pop - up message may display if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to
the last display selected after five seconds of
no ACC display activity.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating.”
Fuel Economy
Two submenu pages; one with Current Value
(instantaneous calculation of the fuel economy)
displayed and one without the Current Value
displayed (toggle the left or right arrow
button to select one):
Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
Range To Empty (miles or km).
Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or
km/L).
The Max and Min values will correspond to
the particular engine requirements.
Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an
amber color and turn green as Fuel Economy
improves.
Hold the OK button to reset average fuel
economy information.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Toggle the left
or right arrow button to select Trip A or
Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, L/100km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since the last reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
This menu displays the Audio information of the
currently playing audio source (e.g. FM radio).
Messages
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages, if any. Pushing the right
or left arrow button will allow you to scroll
through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to enter the submenus.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
1. Upper Left
Compass (default)
Outside Temp.
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
2. Upper Right
Compass
Outside Temp (default)
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
None
3. Center
Menu Title (default)
Compass
Outside Temp.
Time
Range to Empty
Average (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Information
Digital Speed
None
4. Current Gear
On
Off (default)
5. Odometer
Show (default)
Hide
6. Gear Display
Full (default)
Single
7. Restore Defaults
Ok
Cancel
Diagnostics — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to view engine and
emission vehicle faults.
Push OK to have the most recent fault code
sent.
There is a delay when the next diagnostic
code is requested during which the following
message is displayed:
“Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.”
Driver must push the OK button again to see
the next Pcode otherwise current message
remains displayed.
Driver exits when they cycle to another
submenu (up or down).
Faults are displayed from newest to the
oldest.
If the menu is exited before the end of codes
is reached - when the driver re-enters the list
will be restarted from the beginning.
When no codes are present or the last code
is reached = (P0000) and this message is
displayed:
“No or End of Diagnostic Codes.”
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release OK to enter speed warning.
Use the up or down arrow button to select a
desired speed, then push and release OK to set
the speed. The white passive speed limiter tell-
tale will light up with a notification text message
(Speed Warning Set to XX), followed by the
selected unit. When the set speed is exceeded,
an audible chime will sound for up to 10
seconds or until the speed is no longer
exceeded. The white passive speed limiter tell-
tale will turn yellow and will flash, and a pop up
message of “Speed Warning Exceeded” will
display.
NOTE:
You can turn the Speed Warning off by using the
up or down arrows to scroll through speed list
and select OFF at the bottom of the list.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional moni-
toring of the electrical system and status of the
vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be consid-
ered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indi-
cate that the parking brake is applied, that the
brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an over-
heated engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches
the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to “Elec-
tric Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and auto-
matic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is acti-
vated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this
warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diag-
nosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF indicator will be lit any time the
Traction Mode is set to Sport, Track or Full OFF
in Drive Modes.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the indi-
cations corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, have the brake system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approxi-
mately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn
on and a chime will sound. The light
will remain on until fuel is added.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Colli-
sion Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
close the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not
functioning properly and that service
is required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is
not operating and needs service.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indi-
cate that Forward Collision Warning is
off.
Refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
Green Indicator Lights
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO Mode
is active. Refer to the Drive Modes
Supplement for further information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when
the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Without
Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting
for the ACC system when the system
is engaged. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Sport Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active.
Refer to the Drive Modes Supplement
for further information.
White Indicator Lights
Speed Warning Indicator Light
The indicator light will illuminate white
along with a notification text message
(Speed Warning Set to XX followed by
unit). When the set speed is just
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
exceeded, a single chime will sound along with
pop up message of Speed Warning Exceeded.
When the set speed is exceeded, the indicator
will light up yellow and flash along with a contin-
uous chime (up to 10 seconds or until the speed
is no longer exceeded).
NOTE:
The number “31” is only an example of a speed
that can be selected.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) has been turned
on, but is not set. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active.
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement
for further information.
Track Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Track
Mode is active.
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement
for further information.
Custom Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Custom
Mode is active.
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement
for further information.
Valet Mode SRT Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Valet Mode
is active.
Refer to the Drive Mode Supplement
for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam head-
lights are on. With the low beams acti-
vated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off,
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diag-
nosis and service of your vehicle and emissions
system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emis-
sions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a dead
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on
as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock, and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
SAFETY 93
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Elec-
tronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Miti-
gation (ERM). These systems work together to
enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support
(RBS).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake applica-
tion and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.
The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do
not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking
is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system
anticipates the potential for wheel lift by moni-
toring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system
enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
SAFETY 95
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited
slip feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushes
may be required to return to ESC On.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track"
are ESC “Partial Off” mode(s).
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
"Traction Sport" and "Traction Track" (if
equipped) are ESC “Partial Off” mode(s). Upon
the first push of the ESC button the system goes
into SPORT mode, indication comes on in the
cluster (a picture of the vehicle with the word
SPORT), and the light in the cluster is illumi-
nated. The second push of the ESC button the
system will go into TRACK mode, indication
comes on in the cluster (a picture of the vehicle
with the word TRACK), and the light in the
cluster remains illuminated. When it is pushed
a third time the ESC will go back into ESC On, no
indication, and the illumination in the cluster
turns off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushes
may be required to return to ESC On.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
If Equipped — "ESC Sport" and "ESC Track"
are ESC “Partial Off” mode(s).
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will illu-
minate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display
in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off Traction Sport” mode,
the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the
limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off Traction Track” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, is enabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When
in “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
SAFETY 97
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON mode. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activa-
tion/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Acti-
vation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
is placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indi-
cates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake pres-
sure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 SAFETY
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain
active.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC OFF” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control
four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
SAFETY 99
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right.
8. Place the ignition to the OFF mode and then
back to ON. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is
disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodi-
cally apply a small amount of brake pressure to
remove any water buildup on the front brake
rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an emer-
gency braking situation may occur by moni-
toring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) will
prepare the brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine power to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the
vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 SAFETY
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the
vehicle is in any gear.
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-
tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear.
The BSM system may experience drop outs
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle
or any small object remains at the side of the
vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is neces-
sary. The BSM system will issue an alert during
these types of zone entries.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
SAFETY 101
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a rela-
tive speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h)) and
the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approx-
imately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occa-
sionally the system may alert on such objects.
This is normal operation and your vehicle does
not require service.
Overtaking/Passing
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and, if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situa-
tions.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alerts, including reducing the radio
volume so that the alert can be better heard.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
SAFETY 103
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are avail-
able in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in RCP mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio volume is
reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audio alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be
reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio volume
is reduced so that the alert can be better heard.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation -
If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display),
to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) System, to calculate the
probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
5 mph (10 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
SAFETY 105
Turning FCW On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is on; this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front of you.
The Forward Collision activation/deactivation is
located in "Uconnect Settings" under "Safety
And Driving Assistance". Forward Collision can
be checked or unchecked.
When FCW is selected off, there will be an "FCW
OFF" icon that appears in the instrument cluster
display.
Changing the FCW status to off prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you.
NOTE:
The FCW system’s default state is on. The FCW
system state is kept in memory from one igni-
tion cycle to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
NOTE:
FCW system is temporarily turned off when ESC
Full Off Mode is active.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW Sensitivity settings are programmable
through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting in
the “On” setting. This allows the system to warn
you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you when you are farther away and it
applies limited braking. This gives you the most
reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front of you when you
are much closer. This setting provides less reac-
tion time than the “Far” setting, which allows for
a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 SAFETY
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres-
sure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information on how to prop-
erly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure
will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pres-
sure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pres-
sure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard pres-
sure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
SAFETY 107
(Continued)
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 SAFETY
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
ings
The TPMS Warning Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and a
chime will sound when tire pressure is
low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display an “Inflate to XX” message and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those shown in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will
change color back to the original color, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Service Tire Pressure System"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
SAFETY 109
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
"Service Tire Pressure System" message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display
in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPM sensors
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the
compact or non-matching full size spare
tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the
graphic in the instrument cluster will still
display a different color pressure value and
an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “Service Tire Pressure System” message
for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“Service Tire Pressure System” message and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 SAFETY
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “Service Tire Pressure System”
message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"Service Tire Pressure System" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
SAFETY 111
(Continued)
Here are some simple steps you can take to mini-
mize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear
seat, FCA US LLC recommends that you do
not allow children 12 years old and under to
ride in your vehicle.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor-
mation) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster
seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact infor-
mation.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Vehicles Without Passenger Seating
Installed
If your vehicle does not have a factory installed
front passenger seat and/or rear passenger
seats, the features described in this section
may not be available in your vehicle.
This vehicle has been designed to maximize
total performance. The passenger seats may be
deleted, which may affect the NVH (Noise,
Vibration, and Harshness) characteristics. As a
result, the vehicle may be louder overall.
Furthermore, the passenger seats and seat
belts system are deleted.
Vehicles Without Rear Seating Installed
If your vehicle does not have factory installed
rear passenger seats, the features described in
this section may not be available in your vehicle.
This vehicle has been designed to maximize
total performance. The rear seats may be
deleted, which may affect the NVH (Noise,
Vibration, and Harshness) characteristics. As a
result, the vehicle may be louder overall.
Furthermore, the rear seats and seat belts
system are deleted.
WARNING!
If the passenger and/or rear seats have
been removed, do not ride in those areas.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
If this vehicle was not factory equipped with
a passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install
a passenger seat because the safety
systems, including the air bags and seat-
belt, may not properly protect you.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in this area are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
Only ride in available seating positions
equipped with seat belt systems. Always
properly wear your seat belt. Failure to do
so could result in an increased risk of
serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating positions to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat if the head restraints are not in place
of their proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING! (Continued)
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
If the rear seat has been removed, do not
ride in that area. In a collision, people riding
in this area are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
SAFETY 113
(Continued)
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
If this vehicle was not factory equipped with
a passenger seat, NEVER attempt to install
a passenger seat because the safety
systems, including the air bags and seat-
belt, may not properly protect you.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in this area are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
Only ride in available seating positions
equipped with seat belt systems. Always
properly wear your seat belt. Failure to do
so could result in an increased risk of
serious injury or death in the event of an
accident.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating positions to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
WARNING! (Continued)
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat if the head restraints are not in place
of their proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside
of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
SAFETY 115
(Continued)
(Continued)
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
WARNING! (Continued)
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
SAFETY 117
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an autho-
rized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt
Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Vehicle With Rear Seating
Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat
Available
Passenger Seat Delete — No Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
SAFETY 119
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing neces-
sary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with
a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must
be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System
and Head Restraint for the safety of the
passenger.
If the front passenger and/or rear seats have
been removed do not ride in those areas.
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
NOTE:
Vehicles with front passenger seat deleted will
not be equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle
Switch, Seat Belt Pretensioner, Supplemental
Seat Mounted Side Airbag, and Seat Track Posi-
tion Sensors for the front passenger.
If the front passenger and/or rear seats have
been removed do not ride in those areas.
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must
be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System
and Head Restraint for the safety of the
passenger.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu-
minate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a
fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bags/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-
stage driver and front passenger air bags. This
system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system compo-
nents.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy-
ment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck under-
rides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
(Continued)
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved inter-
action with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-
priate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-
pendently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-
sions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether deployment in a particular roll-
over event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi-
ences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
NOTE:
Vehicles with front passenger seat deleted will
not be equipped with the Seat Belt Buckle
Switch, Seat Belt Pretensioner, Supplemental
Seat Mounted Side Airbag, and Seat Track Posi-
tion Sensors for the front passenger.
All passenger occupants within the vehicle must
be in a seat equipped with a Seat Belt System
and Head Restraint for the safety of the
passenger. If the front passenger and/or rear
seats have been removed do not ride in those
areas.
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another colli-
sion, the air bags will not be in place to protect
you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
(Continued)
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If
Equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before reset-
ting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions. If you must install a forward facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat, then
you must use the seat belt system to secure the
restraint. A top tether strap extension may be
needed to reach the tether anchor on the rear
shelf directly behind the passenger seat.
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions. If you must install a forward facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat, then
you must use the seat belt system to secure the
restraint. A top tether strap extension may be
needed to reach the tether anchor on the rear
shelf directly behind the passenger seat.
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child
Restraints
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child
restraint in these positions.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child
restraint in these positions.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
Vehicles Without Rear Seating Installed
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear
passenger seat, your vehicle is not equipped
with LATCH anchorages. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a rear seat, FCA US LLC recom-
mends that you do not allow children 12 years
old and under to ride in your vehicle. If the rear
seats are not present in your vehicle, NEVER
install a child restraint in these positions. If you
must install a forward facing child restraint in
the front passenger seat, then you must use the
seat belt system to secure the restraint. A top
tether strap extension may be needed to reach
the tether anchor on the rear shelf directly
behind the passenger seat.
Vehicle With Rear Seating — LATCH Positions For
Installing Child Restraints
Rear Seat Delete — No LATCH Positions In This Vehicle
Passenger Seats Deleted — No LATCH Positions In
This Vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system
to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead
of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual
for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt
to install a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual
for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located in the panel between the rear
seatback and the rear window. They
are found under a plastic cover with the tether
anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center posi-
tion blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for
the outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position
blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt,
do not install a child seat in that outboard posi-
tion.
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child
restraint in these positions.
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child
restraint in these positions.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
(Continued)
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-
tion.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it
is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant
Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
Vehicle With Rear Seating
Rear Seat Delete — Only Front Passenger Seat
Available
Passenger Seat Delete — No Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt
to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with
an ALR retractor.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if adjust-
able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-
tion.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING!
If the rear or front passenger seats are not
present in your vehicle, NEVER install a child
restraint in these positions.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor
directly behind the seat where you are
placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is not equipped with a rear seat,
FCA US LLC recommends that you do not allow
children 12 years old and under to ride in your
vehicle. If the rear seats are not present in your
vehicle, NEVER install a child restraint in these
positions. If you must install a forward facing
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
2 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
child restraint in the front passenger seat, then
you must use the seat belt system to secure the
restraint. A top tether strap extension may be
needed to reach the tether anchor on the rear
shelf directly behind the passenger seat.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-
tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
WARNING! (Continued)
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
(Continued)
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the igni-
tion switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light
is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illu-
minate with a single chime when a fault with the
Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on
until the fault is removed. If the light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme-
diately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter-
fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is
securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when
using “Track-Use” parts and equipment:
NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on
public roads. FCA US LLC does not autho-
rize the use of “Track-Use” equipment on
public roads.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
(Continued)
The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for
race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver, engi-
neers should supervise the installation of
“Track-Use” parts.
FCA US LLC does not authorize the installa-
tion or use of any part noted as “Track-Use”
on any new vehicle prior to its first retail
sale.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip-
ment before driving on public roads.
ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat
belts when driving on public roads.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector
in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before
starting vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a
clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not
start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the
floor.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The gear selector must be in the PARK position
before you can start the engine. Apply the
brakes before shifting into any driving gear.
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission
Place the ignition in the START mode and release
it as the starter engages. The starter motor will
automatically disengage itself once engine is
running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
occurs:
1. Place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Wait 10 to 15 seconds.
3. Repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in OFF mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
Only
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while
pushing and holding the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. Release the ENGINE START/STOP button
when the engine starts. If the vehicle fails to
start within 15 seconds, release the
ENGINE START/STOP button, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Automatic
Transmission Only
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button — Manual Transmission Only
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the gear
selector in NEUTRAL, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. Place the gear selector in FIRST gear or
REVERSE and then apply the parking brake.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC posi-
tion, the system will automatically time out
after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition
will switch to the OFF position.
If the ignition switch is left in the RUN posi-
tion, the system will automatically time out
after 30 minutes of inactivity if the vehicle
speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and the engine is
not running.
If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be
held for two seconds or three short pushes in
a row before the engine will shut off. The igni-
tion switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the vehicle is stopped, placed in
park and the button is pushed twice to the
OFF position.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button — Automatic Transmission Only
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the
instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmis-
sion is in PARK, the system will automatically
time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
ignition will switch to the OFF position.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situa-
tions on the following pages occur. It is a
backup system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, The
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a backup system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
(Continued)
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the gear selector must be returned to “P”
to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instru-
ment cluster display and on the gear selector.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-
tures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from an autho-
rized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” or “Cold
Weather Operation” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC elec-
trical outlet with a grounded, three-wire exten-
sion cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has
a removable cap that is located near the air box.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
3.6L & 5.7L
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory are high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as an indica-
tion of difficulty. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
6.2L & 6.4L
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance and maximum durability
for your new vehicle.
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance and maximum durability
for your new vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class
manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other.
This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the
first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe
the following driving behaviors during the new
vehicle break-in period:
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for
an extended period of time.
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-
tion.
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-
tion in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting
manually at higher RPM when possible.
Do not perform sustained operation with the
accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):
Do not participate in track events, sport
driving schools, or similar activities during
the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher through the first oil change interval.
Running the engine with an oil level below the
add mark can cause severe engine damage.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK or REVERSE (manual trans-
mission only) position.
When the parking brake is applied and the igni-
tion switch is in the ON/RUN position, the
“Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake
Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector
out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To release the parking brake, pull the
parking brake release handle.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the
park brake pedal fully. To release the parking
brake, press the park brake pedal a second
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
(Continued)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
Manual Gear Selector
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off
the accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the
accelerator pedal. Damage to the transmission
or clutch may occur if you do not fully press the
clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator pedal
when shifting.
Shift Pattern
The six-speed manual transmission has a
spring that centers the gear selector near
THIRD and FOUTH gear. This spring helps you
know which gear you are in when you are
shifting. Be careful when shifting from FIRST to
SECOND or downshifting from SIXTH to FIFTH.
The spring will try to pull the gear selector
toward THIRD and FOURTH gear. Make sure you
move the gear selector into SECOND or FIFTH
gear. If you let the gear selector move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting
from FIRST to FOURTH or from SIXTH to THIRD
gear.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the park
brake fully applied. The park brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a
hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged,
as this will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch. Refer to “Hill Start Assist” in
“Safety” for further information.
Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the
floor may cause increased shift efforts, and
may result in damage to the clutch and
transmission.
Do not rest your hand on the gear selector
while driving, as this may result in transmis-
sion synchronizer damage.
Do not attempt to shift the transmission if
the rear wheels are spinning due to loss of
traction. Damage to the transmission may
occur.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
You must always use FIRST gear (or REVERSE)
when starting from a standing position.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
for fuel economy, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart.
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (rela-
tively steady speeds) may result in increased
fuel economy.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a
desired acceleration rate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission
reverse inhibitor system. Always depress the
clutch pedal fully to the floor before shifting
into REVERSE. When vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor
activates to help prevent shifts into
REVERSE. When at a complete stop, you may
notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN
position for Keyless Enter-N-Go), as
compared to the ignition LOCK position (OFF
position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is
normal operation of the transmission reverse
inhibitor system.
Due to the high performance nature of your
drivetrain, you may hear your transmission.
This can be most noticeable when the vehicle
is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be
heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also,
this may be more noticeable when the trans-
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting into REVERSE.
Failure to do so may result in transmission
damage.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS — NON SRT
Axle Ratio 1-4 4-5 5-6
3.90
mph 20 37 48
km/h 32 59 77
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS — SRT
Engine 1-4 4-5 5-6
6.2L Supercharged
mph 20 25 42
km/h 32 40 67
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
(Continued)
mission is warm. This is a normal condition
and is not an indication of a problem with
your clutch or transmission.
1–4 Skip Shift
In Auto Drive Mode, Default, or Street Drive
Modes, there are times when you must shift the
transmission directly from FIRST gear to
FOURTH gear instead of from FIRST gear to
SECOND gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This
occurs when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is
higher than 106°F (41°C), vehicle speed is
greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) but less than
21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is in
FIRST gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle
or less.
NOTE:
The 1 - 4 Skip Shift feature is disabled when
selecting Sport Mode, or when selecting Track
or Custom Drive Modes (SRT only). Refer to the
“Drive Modes Supplement” for further descrip-
tions of these modes.
After you shift the transmission to FOURTH gear,
you can press the clutch in and shift to another
forward gear.
Downshifting
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life,
downshift to maintain a safe speed when
descending a steep grade.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while
downshifting, could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle. You could have a collision.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while down-
shifting or downshift at too high an engine
speed, you could damage the engine, trans-
mission, or clutch.
Do not downshift into FIRST gear when the
vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), as you could damage the
engine and/or clutch.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadver-
tently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
sion Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is
displayed both on the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, press the lock button on
the gear selector and move the selector rear-
ward or forward. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. You must also
press the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL
into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
Automatic Transmission Gear Selector
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL
(AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as M1,
M2, M3, etc. Refer to "AutoStick" in this section
for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL
(AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
tion). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the trans-
mission gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear
selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the transmis-
sion into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, trav-
eling into strong head winds, or while towing a
heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control (if
equipped, refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmis-
sion temperature as well as vehicle speed.
Normal operation will resume once the trans-
mission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of trans-
mission shifting (also known as AutoStick
mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information). Toggling the gear selector
forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3,
etc.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electroni-
cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-
vated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at
all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some
situations, the transmission may not re-engage
if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
nated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions,
and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the trans-
mission can be reset to regain all forward gears
by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the trans-
mission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position,
the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between the eight available gears. To acti-
vate AutoStick, move the gear selector into the
MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position).
The current transmission gear will be displayed in
the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted
“M” (Manual) indication. When the gear selector is
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gear selector
forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the
steering wheel, if equipped) to downshift the trans-
mission to the next lower gear, or tap the lever rear-
ward (+) (or tap the (+) shift paddle, if equipped) to
command an upshift.
Shifter Paddles
NOTE:
Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted
shift paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the gear
selector is in DRIVE, will activate a temporary
AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to enter AutoS-
tick mode will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to enter
AutoStick mode will retain the current gear.
The current gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster, but the “M” will not be
highlighted. The transmission will revert back
to normal operation (if the gear selector
remains in DRIVE) after a period of time,
depending on accelerator pedal activity.
In some models, the shift paddles may be
disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using
Drive Mode Set-Up, accessed by selecting
Performance Control or SRT Drive Modes
from the Apps menu in the Uconnect screen.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver (using the gear selector, or the shift
paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector
in DRIVE), the transmission will automatically
shift up when maximum engine speed is
reached. If the accelerator is fully depressed,
the transmission will downshift when
possible (based on current vehicle speed and
gear, except 6.4L models). Lack of acceler-
ator pedal activity will cause the transmission
to revert to automatic operation.
In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector
in DRIVE), the transmission will automatically
shift up when maximum engine speed is
reached. If the accelerator is fully depressed,
the transmission will downshift when
possible (based on current vehicle speed and
gear, except 6.2L and 6.4L models). Lack of
accelerator pedal activity will cause the
transmission to revert to automatic opera-
tion.
If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear
selector in MANUAL position), manual gear
selection will be maintained until the gear
selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described
below. The transmission will not upshift auto-
matically at redline in this mode, nor will
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator
pedal is pressed to the floor.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur
and an indication will display.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed and an indication
will display.
Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if
equipped), or holding the gear selector in the
(-) position, will downshift the transmission to
the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position, or press and hold
the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear
selector is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
again indicated in the instrument cluster. You
can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any
time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
CONTROL
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up for
typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmis-
sion (when equipped with automatic transmis-
sion), and steering systems are all set to their
SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified
shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as
well the greatest amount of steering feel. This
mode may be activated and deactivated by
pushing the SPORT button on the instrument
panel switch bank.
NOTE:
If equipped with a manual transmission, the
1 - 4 Skip Shift Feature is disabled in SPORT
Mode.
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a
“SUPER TRACK PAK” button, refer to “Drive
Modes Supplement” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L AND 6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. When the
system is active, an indication will display within
the instrument cluster “Fuel Economy” main
menu screen.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The Electric Power Steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the elec-
tric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still
have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
”Customer Programmable Features” within
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If the Electric Power Steering warning
icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE
SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. Refer to “Warning Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h) or 20 mph (32 km/h),
depending on engine size and axle ratio.
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control System can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Speed Control is on. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Speed Control is
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the acceler-
ator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will
appear indicating what speed was set. A cruise
indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
when the speed is set.
1 — On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
speed control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmis-
sion only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major road-
ways. However, it is not a safety system and not
designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control
function performs differently. Please refer to
the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
(Continued)
(Continued)
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes func-
tion differently. Always confirm which mode is
selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning system.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed
drops below 15 mph (24 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the
“ready” state, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
in Full Off mode.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET (+)/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will show
in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed.
The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h).
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
The ACC system applies the brake down to
15 mph (24 km/h) when following a target
vehicle.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting will show in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Decrease button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instru-
ment cluster display will show the “Sensed
Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. (Refer to the infor-
mation on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will
read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional
information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try acti-
vating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system func-
tionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steep-
ness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are trav-
eling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may
not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the
ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect
a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed
without requiring the driver to operate the accel-
erator. Cruise Control can only be operated if
the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
system is turned on via the on/off control. It
turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precau-
tions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the previous ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning
display will turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the sound tone will change from
fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “ParkSense
Off” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ment cluster display will display the “ParkSense
Off” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when Park-
Sense is disabled or defective. The ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed and
the system is disabled or requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily
and then the LED will be on.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Arc — Left Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arc — Center
Rear
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arc — Right Rear None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message for five
seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system has detected a faulted condi-
tion, the instrument cluster display will display
the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
inside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion, and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pres-
sure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense or render the system temporarily
unavailable.
When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the
instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE
OFF" for five seconds. Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will show
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding an audio tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects
such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be shown in the
instrument cluster display.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located
on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate. The image will be displayed in the touch-
screen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera
Delay feature and it is turned on, the rear
camera image will be displayed for up to
10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. However, this feature is canceled if
the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle's ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or by pressing the image defeat “X”
button.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the last touchscreen
appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position. The active guide
lines will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Rear Park Assist system.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the rear view camera image will
continue to be displayed until the transmission
is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the image defeat
“X” button is pressed.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door
on the left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to
pull open the door. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for
use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap
is tightened properly. The MIL in the instru-
ment cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap
is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a ”gASCAP” message will display in
the odometer or a “Check Gascap” message will
display in the instrument cluster. If this occurs,
tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If
the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel
filler cap may also turn on the MIL.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is
shown on the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This
information should be used for passenger and
luggage loading as indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of
the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn
on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and
cargo. The total load must be limited so that you
do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs,
tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not
exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of
your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded
and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side.
Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible.
Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load
is within the specified GVWR, you must redis-
tribute the weight. Improper weight distribution
can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's
GVWR and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and infor-
mation on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow
your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the
requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer
towing.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recom-
mended.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it
is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables, and equip-
ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on
the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combina-
tion.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multi-
plied by the maximum width of the front of a
trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a
mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies indi-
vidual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a fric-
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
tion/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contrib-
utes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry stan-
dard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Trailer towing with the 6.4L or 6.2L Supercharged engine is not recommended.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.
3.6L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
5.7L Automatic 12 sq ft (1.11 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
(Continued)
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Sched-
uled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation proce-
dures.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
Max loading as defined on the “Tire and
Loading Information” placard.
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following illustra-
tions.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The trans-
mission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
This action will also provide better engine
braking.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
The only acceptable method for towing this
vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is
known as hydroplaning and may cause partial
or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following
precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine,
transmission and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
(Continued)
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited
Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does
not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a
given axle for improved handling.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flashers switch is located
on the instrument panel, below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 195
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a ten second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS oper-
ator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle infor-
mation and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact your dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active.
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps 578
Visor Vanity Lamps A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194
Door Courtesy 562
Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID) D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) *
Halogen Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of this,
you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp
— Models With Halogen Headlamps — If
Equipped
1. Open the hood.
Headlamp Assembly Location
NOTE:
Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the head-
lamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the large dust cap from the head-
lamp housing by turning it counterclock-
wise.
Front Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Tail Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise, and
remove.
Headlamp Assembly
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket
assembly and install the replacement bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into
the headlamp assembly, and then turn it
clockwise.
6. Reinstall the dust cap.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp
— Models With High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and
the key removed. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a headlamp bulb your-
self. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lamps. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front Park/Signature Lamp
The Front Park/Signature function is part of the
headlamp assembly and use LED lamps that
are not serviceable separately. The headlamps
must be replaced as an assembly, see an
authorized dealer.
Front Turn/DRL Lamp
The Front Turn/DRL function is part of the head-
lamp assembly and use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The headlamps must be
replaced as an assembly, see an authorized
dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not
serviceable separately. The Side Markers must
be replaced as an assembly, see an authorized
dealer.
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps
that are not serviceable separately. The Tail/
Turn and Stop Lamps must be replaced as an
assembly, see an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause
serious electrical shock or electrocution if not
serviced properly. See an authorized dealer
for service.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps
that are not serviceable separately. The Center
Tail/Backup Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly; see an authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are
not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is
not serviceable separately. The License Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly; see an
authorized dealer.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse).
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located
in the engine compartment. This module
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location
and descriptions are printed on the inside of the
power distribution center cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
1 – – Fuse – Spare
2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
4 30 Amp Pink – Starter
5 40 Amp Green – Anti Lock Brake
6 30 Amp Pink – Anti Lock Brake
7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
8 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue – Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
9 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
10 – 10 Amp Red Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood Lamp – Police
11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
13 – – Fuse – Spare
14 – – Fuse – Spare
15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped
16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped
18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor
21
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
–
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
22
40 Amp Green / 20 Amp Blue –
Police
– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
23 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 1
24 50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue –
Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed
# 3
28 – – Fuse – Spare
29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module (Challenger / Charger Police)
30 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module
32 – – Fuse – Spare
33 – – Fuse – Spare
34 – 25 Amp Clear ASD Feed #1
35 – 20 Amp Yellow ASD Feed #2
36 – 10 Amp Red
Anti-Lock Brake Module / Steering Column Lock Module (300 if
equipped)
37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller
38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
39 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch/ EPS */ Vacuum Pump *
48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module / Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
53 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located
in the trunk under the spare tire access panel.
This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse
cavity location and descriptions are printed on
the inside of the power distribution center
cover.
Opening The Access Cover
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #1
3 – – Fuse – Spare
4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2
5
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
– Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #1
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
7 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #2
8 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting
9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks
10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Control Module
11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Control Module
12 – 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter/ IP APO – If Equipped
15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower
16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp – Police
17 20 Amp Blue – Right Spot Lamp – Police
18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface – Police
19 – – Fuse – Spare
20 – – Fuse – Spare
21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT HO)
22 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Gateway Mod
23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door – If Equipped/Diagnostic Port
24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack
25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
26 – 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmission Module (Charger Non- Police/300)
27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – If Equipped
31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster
33 – 15 Amp Blue
Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (300) – If
Equipped/ Remote Start – If Equipped
34 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Module/Clock (300)
35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio
38 – 20 Amp Yellow Media Hub/ Console APO
40 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT HO – If Equipped)
41 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT HO – If Equipped)
42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost
43 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Heated Seat – If Equipped/ Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
44 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera – If Equipped
45 – 15 Amp Blue
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass (Charger/300) / Lane
Departure
46 – – Fuse – Spare
47 – 10 Amp Red Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped
48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension – (6.4L / 6.2L)
49 – – Fuse – Spare
50 – – Fuse – Spare
51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated / Vented Seats – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
52 – 10 Amp Red Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped
53 – 10 Amp Red HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor
54 – – Fuse – Spare
55 – – Fuse – Spare
56 – – Fuse – Spare
57 – – Fuse – Spare
58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals – Police
60 – – Fuse – Spare
61 – – Fuse – Spare
62 – – Fuse – Spare
63 – – Fuse – Spare
64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows (Charger/300)
65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
66 – – Fuse – Spare
67 – 10 Amp Red
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR View Mirror / Police Run
Acc Relay
68 – 10 Amp Red RR USB Timer/ RR Sunshade – If Equipped
69 – – Fuse – Spare
70 – – Fuse – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps
to access the jack and spare tire.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Opening The Access Panel
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire
counterclockwise to remove it.
Loosen Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack coun-
terclockwise to remove it.
Loosen Jack Fastener
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
(Continued)
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly
from under the spare tire. Turn the jack
screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (auto-
matic transmission) or FIRST gear (manual
transmission).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and place an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE or FIRST gear.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
Jack Engagement Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug
wrench.
NOTE:
When the following label is present, the spare
tire must be used for the rear wheel(s) only. For
a flat front tire, you must first install the spare
on one of the rear tires. Then, follow the jacking
instructions for front tire replacement and
replace the front road wheel with the wheel
removed from the rear of the vehicle.
Spare Tire Label
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully
before raising the vehicle.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug
wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug
nuts on the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the
lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire and install the spare tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to
“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for additional
warnings, cautions, and information about
the spare tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
Tighten Lug Nuts
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifica-
tions” in “Technical Specifications” section
for proper lug nut torque.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure
the base of the jack faces the front of the
vehicle before tightening down the fastener.
Tighten Jack Fastener
Tighten Tire Fastener
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifica-
tions” in “Technical Specifications” for
proper lug nut torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be
used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Location (SRT Model)
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5)
and turn to this position for air
pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5)
and turn to this position to inject
the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose) (6) when selecting this
mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
(4) once to turn on the Tire Service
Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the
Tire Service Kit)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
(Continued)
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
(1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expira-
tion date (printed at the lower right hand
corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system. Refer to “Sealant
Bottle And Hose Replacement” section (F) in
this section.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
are a one tire application use and need to be
replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your orig-
inal equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump Hose (7) and make sure the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode
when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures
less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the
tread of your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach the valve
stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best posi-
tioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air
pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto trans-
mission) or in Gear (manual transmission)
and place the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then
remove the cap from the fitting at the end of
the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button (4), the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and
into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the
Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant
Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure
the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn
On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the
engine is running before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the
Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose
(6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through the hose (typi-
cally takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3)
will decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on
the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check
the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button (2) to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
(6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on
the fitting at the end of the hose, and place
the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive
Vehicle.”
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating
the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten
minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “(A) When-
ever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before
continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn
to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color)
and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7)
onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pres-
sure indicated on the tire and loading infor-
mation label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button (2) to reduce the tire pressure
to the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8)
may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result
in sealant contacting your skin, clothing,
and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result
in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) assembly at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Refer to “(F) Sealant
Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release
button in the recessed area under the
sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The
Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the
bottle and dispose of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the
housing. Push the bottle into the housing.
An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting
at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and
return the hose to its storage area (located
on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be
used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Location (SRT Model)
Tire Service Kit Location
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2)
and turn to this position for air
pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (5) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2)
and turn to this position to inject
the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (clear hose) (3) when selecting this
mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
(1) once to turn on the Tire Service
Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (1) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (9) to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
(4) and Sealant Hose (3) prior to the expira-
tion date (printed at the upper right hand
corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system. Refer to “Sealant
Bottle And Hose Replacement” section (F) in
this section.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
1 — Power Button
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
6 — Sealant Bottle Release Button
7 — Power Plug
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — Deflation Button
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
(Continued)
(Continued)
The Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3)
are a one tire application use and need to be
replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your orig-
inal equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump Hose (5) and make sure the
Mode Select Knob (2) is in the Air Mode when
inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant
into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than
1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your
tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hoses (3) and (5) to reach the valve
stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best posi-
tioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air
pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto trans-
mission) or in Gear (manual transmission)
and place the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn
to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) and then
remove the cap from the fitting at the end of
the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose (3) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button (1), the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle (4) through the Sealant Hose (3) and
into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (3):
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn Off the
Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant
Hose (3) from the valve stem. Make sure
the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (3) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (2) is in
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
(Continued)
the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button (1) to turn
On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the
engine is running before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (4) may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (2) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the
Air Pump Hose (5) only, not the Sealant Hose
(3).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (3):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through the hose (typi-
cally takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose (3), the
Pressure Gauge (8) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (8)
will decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (4) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (4) is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on
the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check
the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge (8).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn off the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
top of the Sealant Bottle (4) and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
(3) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on
the fitting at the end of the hose, and place
the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive
Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8)
may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating
the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten
minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “(A) When-
ever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before
continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn
to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (5) (black in color)
and screw the fitting at the end of hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge (8).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pres-
sure indicated on the tire and loading infor-
mation label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant
Hose (3) assembly at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Refer to “(F) Sealant
Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result
in sealant contacting your skin, clothing,
and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result
in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
(Continued)
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle
release button at the lower right hand
corner of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then pull out the bottle holding the
button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (4) in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose (3) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the
housing. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle
release button, then push the bottle into the
housing by holding the button. An audible
click will be heard indicating the bottle is
locked into place. Release the button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting
at the end of the Sealant Hose (3) and
return the hose to its storage area (located
on top of the housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery posts are located on
the right side of the engine compartment for
jump starting.
Jump Starting Locations
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Apply the parking brake, shift into PARK
(automatic transmission) or FIRST gear
(manual transmission) and cycle the igni-
tion to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION
To move the vehicle in cases where the trans-
mission will not shift out of PARK (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access
the Manual Park Release lever.
Console Storage Bin
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
fish the tether strap up through the opening
in the console base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the
center of the lever, and disengage the lever
locking tab by pushing it to the right.
Engaging The Lever
6. Pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up
and rearward until it locks in place in the
vertical position. The vehicle is now out of
PARK and can be moved. Release the
parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on
the rear side) rearward (away from the
lever) to unlatch the lever.
Disengaging The Lever
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever
forward and down, to its original position,
until the locking tab snaps into place to
secure the lever.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver's seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed posi-
tion.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console. Reinstall the console storage bin.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For vehi-
cles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or
FIRST gear and REVERSE (with manual trans-
mission), while gently pressing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pres-
sure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking the
vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC
OFF" switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE / FIRST gear and REVERSE,
do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park
Release" in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground RWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
Transmission in NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if used, same
limitations as above)
NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
Ignition in ON/RUN mode
Transmission in NEUTRAL (NOT in
PARK)
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground)
under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer
to "Manual Park Release" in this section for
instructions on shifting the automatic trans-
mission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off.
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km),
then the only acceptable method of towing is
with a flatbed truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
The manufacturer does not recommend
towing this vehicle using a tow dolly.
Vehicle damage may occur.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/
or transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
3.6L And 5.7L Engines
These engines are equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change indi-
cator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for the vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can
cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than an autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment,
or is operated predominantly at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your
next scheduled service.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering (if
equipped) and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Maintenance Plan — 3.6L And 5.7L
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance chart for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires.
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace air engine cleaner filter if necessary.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect
the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive
Only).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped).
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust park brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel
Drive Only).
X X X X X
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Change the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped) if using your
vehicle for any of the following: Most
of your driving is at sustained
speeds during hot weather, above
90°F (32°C), driving in dusty
conditions, or stop and go driving.
X X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change the transfer case fluid; if
using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road,
or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel
Drive Only).
X X
Change the rear axle fluid and on
models equipped with All Wheel
Drive (AWD) change the front axle
fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet,
off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
X X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engines
The scheduled maintenance services listed in
this manual must be done at the times or mile-
ages specified to protect your vehicle warranty
and ensure the best vehicle performance and
reliability. More frequent maintenance may be
needed for vehicles in severe operating condi-
tions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be
done anytime a malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance.
An “Oil Change Required” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six
months since your last oil change, even if the
oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
Change your engine oil more often if you drive
your vehicle off-road/track usage for an
extended period of time.
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or
6 months, whichever comes first.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than an autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to the steps described under “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this chapter for further
information.
Check the windshield washer solvent and
add if required.
Once A Month
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering
(6.2L only), and add as needed.
Check all lights and other electrical items for
correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Maintenance Plan — 6.2L And 6.4L
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine
oil and engine oil
filter.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rotate the tires,
rotate at the first
sign of irregular
wear, even if it
occurs before
scheduled
maintenance.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
Inspect front
suspension, tie rod
ends, and boot
seals, for cracks or
leaks and all parts
for damage, wear,
improper looseness
or end play; replace
if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
If using your vehicle
for any of the
following: dusty or
off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine
air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake
linings; replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,0
00
250,000
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect the CV/
Universal joints.
X X X X X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the exhaust
system.
X X X X X X X X X X X
Adjust the parking
brake on vehicles
equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X
Inspect the manual
transmission fluid –
if equipped.
X
X
X X X X X X
Inspect the rear axle
fluid.
X X X X X X X X
Change the manual
transmission fluid –
if equipped.
X X X
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
21
0,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Change the rear axle
fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the
following: police,
taxi, fleet or
frequent trailer
towing.
1
X X X
Replace the engine
air cleaner filter.
X X X X X
Replace the air
conditioning filter.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect and replace
the PCV Valve if
necessary
X
Replace the spark
plugs — 6.2L
Engine
2
X X
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Replace the spark
plugs — 6.4L
Engine
2
X
Flush and replace
the engine coolant
at 120 months if not
done at 150,000
miles (240,000 km).
X X
1. For race track usage it is recommended that the axle fluid be changed every 4 hours of on track time.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
6.2L Supercharged Engine
1 — Intercooler Fluid Reservoir 6 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.4L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every month. The best time to check the engine
oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 Quart (1.0 Liter) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range
will raise the oil level to the high end of the
range marking.
Checking Oil Level — 6.2L Supercharged
Engine And 6.4L Engine
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
once a month. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Maintain the oil level in the “SAFE”
range. Adding 1.0 Quart (1 Liter) of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range will
result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE”
range on these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located
in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure
to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent
(not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system
for a few seconds to flush out the residual
water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply
some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 Gallon
(4 Liters) of washer fluid when the message
“Low Washer Fluid” appears in the instrument
cluster.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Maintenance-Free Battery
The vehicle is equipped with a mainte-
nance-free battery. You will never have to add
water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE:
The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump starting.
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose
that should not be disconnected and
should only be replaced with a battery of
the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in this section for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Change Engine Oil — 6.2L And 6.4L Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in this section for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or
6 months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L And 5.7L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Selection — 6.2L And 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends full synthetic
engine oils that meet the American Petroleum
Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full
synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS-12633.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent is recommended
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.fm Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration
in this section.
NOTE:
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent may be used
when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395
is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent is recommended
for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration
in this section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in
improper operation of the Fuel Saver Tech-
nology. Refer to “Fuel Saver Technology – If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 6.2L And 6.4L Engine
Use Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 engine or
equivalent Mopar oil meeting the FCA Material
Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section
for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Shaker Hood — If Equipped
Shaker Hood Oil Filler
For vehicles equipped with a “Shaker Hood”,
the upper scoop will need to be removed so that
oil can be properly added to the engine.
To do this, you will need follow the procedure
below:
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool
located in glove compartment.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
NOTE:
Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside
for the Shaker assembly.
3. Locate the oil fill cover in base assembly to
expose the oil fill cap.
4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil.
5. Re-install Shaker assembly.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Shaker Hood Air Filter Cleaning
1. Remove the air filter from the intake and
set the filter clamp a side.
2. Measure the length of the filter media.
3. Fill a bucket with warm clean water to the
depth matching the filter media measure-
ment and add a mild household detergent
or air filter cleaning solution.
4. Without allowing the solution to flow back
into the inside of the air filter, submerge the
filter media in to the water and let it soak for
ten minutes.
5. Empty the bucket filled with dirty water and
repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. Refill the bucket with clean warm water and
rinse the filter by rotating the filter.
NOTE:
The water should be clean with no signs of dirt
in the bucket.
7. Allow the filter to air dry. Re-install the filter
on the intake system once it is dry.
Shaker Hood Removal And Cleaning
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool
located in glove compartment.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
NOTE:
Be sure to clean off all debris around or inside
for the Shaker assembly.
3. Using a water and mild detergent clean the
following locations.
The water drain slot located at the front
forward edge of the Shaker assembly.
The seals attached to the scoop and air
box.
Lower water drains located in the lower
Shaker assembly and air box as well as
the hood interface areas for the seals.
Apply Mopar Leather, Rubber & Vinyl
Protectant after cleaning to seals.
4. Re-install Shaker assembly.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
T/A Air Filter Maintenance — If Equipped
Clean Engine Air Filter
The scheduled air filter cleaning interval is
30,000 miles (48,280 km), or if in a dusty envi-
ronment the engine air filter should be checked
periodically to ensure optimal air flow.
Cleaning your engine air filter with the recom-
mended Mopar Performance Air Filter Service
Kit is not required if you can still see any part
the wire screen on the entire air filter regardless
of how dirty it may appear. When any part of the
wire screen is no longer visible on the air filter,
that is an indication it is time to clean the air
filter.
1. Spray the air filter with the recommended
Mopar air filter cleaner and let sit for at
least 10 minutes to loosen dirt, before
rinsing.
NOTE:
Never use strong detergents, high pressure, or
gasoline on air filter.
2. Rinse the air filter with cool low-pressure
water applied from the inside (clean side)
out in order to flush the dirt out of the filter.
Continue to rinse the filter until all traces of
the cleaner have been removed.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to repeat steps 1 and 2 if
the air filter is not completely clean.
3. After rinsing the air filter, gently shake off
the excess water and allow air filter to dry
naturally. Do not apply oil until air filter is
completely dry.
NOTE:
Do not use forced air pressure as it may
damage the filtering capabilities of the filter’s
microfibers and also void its warranty.
4. Using the Mopar Performance Air Filter
Service Kit, spray oil evenly along the
crown of each filter pleat holding the
nozzle about 3 inches (76 mm) away from
the air filter. One spray per 2 square inches
(1,290 square mm) of air filter. With one
complete coat of oil, let it wick (saturate)
for about 20 minutes, and if required touch
up any light areas on either side of the
filter.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air condi-
tioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under
the hood, behind a removable panel in the cowl
on the passenger side of the vehicle, next to the
windshield wipers. When installing a new filter,
ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen
by pressing the retaining clips.
Access Door
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access
cover.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in
the direction of airflow, which is toward the
rear of the vehicle (text and arrows on the
filter will indicate this).
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-
cant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind-
shield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, press the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the under-
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-
tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace
as required.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the cata-
lytic converter will not require maintenance.
However, it is important to keep the engine
properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst opera-
tion and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-
heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the
ignition when the transmission is in gear and
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
wires disconnected or removed, such as
when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
NOTE:
The vehicle exhaust system may be equipped
with an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system,
if the exhaust system is replaced with after-
market products a Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) will illuminate.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If coolant is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant.
Check the front of the radiator for any accumu-
lation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose verti-
cally down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tight-
ness of the connection at the bottle and radi-
ator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-
freeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
NOTE:
If equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine
the intercooler must be vacuum flushed and
filled. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an local authorized
dealer.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycolbased
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Addi-
tive Technology) that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
NOTE:
Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant
system pressure cap with the intercooler
system pressure cap. These caps are not inter-
changeable.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your commu-
nity. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil-
dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or
pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine
off and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)
freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As
long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
(Continued)
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-
nance Plan” in this section for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
immediately if the brake system warning light
indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder
when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up
to the top of the “FULL” mark on the side of the
master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because
it may cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only brake fluid that has been recom-
mended by the manufacturer, and has been
kept in a tightly closed container to avoid
contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual
Transmission (If Equipped)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segre-
gated volume of fluid within the brake system
master cylinder reservoir. In the event of
leakage or wear, use only the manufacturer's
recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on
the left side of the transmission. The fluid level
should be 1/4 inch (6.4mm) below the bottom
of the fill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to main-
tain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for further
information.
Change Transmission Fluid
If contaminated with water, change the fluid
immediately. See an authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-
mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to main-
tain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer's recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or damage to the transmission.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the trans-
mission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is
an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers
as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immedi-
ately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
The All Wheel Drive system consists of a
transfer case and front differential. The exterior
surface of these components should be
inspected for evidence of fluid leaks. Confirmed
leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is
located in the middle of the rear housing. To
inspect the transfer case fluid level, remove the
fill/inspection plug. The fluid level should be
even with the bottom of the hole. Use this plug
to add fluid as required.
The front differential fill plug is located on the
outer cover near the halfshaft attachment. To
inspect the differential fluid level, remove the fill
plug. The fluid level should be even with or
slightly below the bottom of the hole.
Fluid Changes
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
Rear Axle
Fluid Level Check
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on
level ground and has been stationary for
15 minutes will improve the accuracy of the
fluid level reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on
the axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5 mm
below the fill plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to
maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in "Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals.
NOTE:
For race track usage it is recommended that the
axle fluid be changed every 4 hours of on track
time.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defini-
tions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
Tire Terminology And Definitions
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pres-
sure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
(Continued)
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of 3 hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire pres-
sure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pres-
sure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-
mance when replacement is needed. Refer to
the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in
this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label
for the size designation of your tire. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety,
handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the orig-
inal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to orig-
inal equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for tempo-
rary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
tion pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-
nity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This
label contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-
nity.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corro-
sion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces
are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains And Traction Devices — Non-SRT
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following traction devices are recom-
mended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
Install on rear tires only.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
(Continued)
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
For a 235/55R18 tire, use of a Peerless Chain
Super Z6 low profile traction device or equiva-
lent is recommended.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
For a 235/55R19 tire, use of an S Class traction
device or equivalent is recommended.
Tire Chains And Traction Devices — SRT
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction
devices are not recommended.
Tire Rotation Recommendations — Non-SRT
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire
chains are used.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some direc-
tional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
Tire Rotation Recommendations — SRT
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance
intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
Tire Rotation — Same Tire Size On Front And
Rear Axle
The suggested rotation method for vehicles
equipped with non directional three season and
all season tires is the “forward cross” as shown
in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
Tire Rotation—Different Tire Size On Front
And Rear Axle
The suggested rotation method is the
“side-to-side” as shown in the following
diagram. This method is required due to
different size tires on the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Tire Rotation (Side-to-Side)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addi-
tion to these grades.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more
than 21 days, you may want to take these steps
to protect your battery.
NOTE:
SRT (if equipped), storage between 21-60 days
can use Storage Mode rather than discon-
necting the battery. Storage Mode can be found
in the instrument cluster display under vehicle
info/battery page.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out
of service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corro-
sive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-
rial to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar Total
Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water.
Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
7
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-
born soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original condi-
tion.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
287
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on
the left front corner of the instrument panel. The
VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through
the windshield.
Windshield VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some loss
of overall braking effectiveness. This may be
evident by increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(for example, repeated brake applications with
the engine off), the brakes will still function. The
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power
system operating.
SRT — If Equipped
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor-
mance braking system. The brake pads are a
semi-metallic compound, which offer superior
fade resistance for consistent operation. A
compromise to using this type of brake pad is
that the brakes may produce more brake dust
and may squeal slightly under certain weather
and operating conditions (i.e., during light brake
applications). These are considered normal
conditions.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
8
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Torque Specifications
Base Model Vehicle
SRT Model Vehicle
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tight-
ening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Patterns
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
111 Ft-Lbs
(150 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 289
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from
the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if
the engine is heard making a heavy knocking
sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gaso-
line with an octane number lower than 87 can
cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you expe-
rience these symptoms, try another brand of gaso-
line before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission)
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high quality
unleaded gasoline having a posted octane
number range of 87 to 89 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus”
gasoline is recommended for optimum perfor-
mance and fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission)
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded
“Premium” gasoline having a posted octane
number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. The use of 91 or higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is required for this engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you expe-
rience these symptoms, try another brand of gaso-
line before considering service for the vehicle.
8
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.2L Supercharged Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations, provide optimal fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality unleaded “Premium” gaso-
line having a posted octane number of 91 as spec-
ified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
6.4L Engine
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Premium”
gasoline having a posted octane number of 91 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for
this engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Refor-
mulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recom-
mended. Properly blended reformulated gaso-
line will provide improved performance and
durability of engine and fuel system compo-
nents.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of TOP TIER Deter-
gent gasoline is recommended. Visit
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 291
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Deter-
gent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG
or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic addi-
tive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufac-
turer recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
8
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 293
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine (87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
5.7L Engine (Automatic Transmission: 87 Octane or 89 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
Ethanol. Manual Transmission: 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.)
18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
6.4L Engine (91 Octane or higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.) 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
8
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
91 Octane or higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
6.2 Supercharged (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters
6.2 Supercharged Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming
to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
4.5 Quarts 4.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 295
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 (240,000 km) Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar SAE
5W-20, Pennzoil SAE 5W-20, and Pennzoil gold 5W-20 semi-synthetic oil.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of
operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic
engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum
0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6 Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7 Engine With Automatic Transmission
89 Octane recommended – 87 Octane acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine & 5.7 Engine With Manual Transmission 91 Octane or higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
8
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 297
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
8-Speed Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703.
Front Axle
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90
(API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 3.6L/5.7L Engine With Automatic Transmission
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85
(API GL-5).
Rear Axle – 5.7L/6.4LEngine With Manual Transmission
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner
44–40.
8
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032.
Engine Oil
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of
operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic
engine oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra Platinum
0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 91 Octane or higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 299
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid or
equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-10838.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT
3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 24 months. This interval is time
based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Mopar LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
301
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C Nav With 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain secu-
rity features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
tions cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Data Collection &
Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instru-
ment panel. These buttons allow you to access
and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Settings button on the bottom bar, or
press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
MULTIMEDIA 303
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once
the setting is complete, press the X button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display
radio, along with the selectable options
pertaining to each setting.
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
+ –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from
(1–10) with the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 MULTIMEDIA
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+ –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from
(1–10) with the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be
in the "party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme On Off
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touch-
screen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
AutoShow Smartphone Display
Upon Connection
On Off
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Controls Screen Time Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
MULTIMEDIA 305
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measurement independently displayed in the instrument cluster display.
The following selectable units of measurement are listed below:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed
In Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display
as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °F °C
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Parkview Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
MULTIMEDIA 307
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Active Parkview Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Sensitivity— If Equipped
Near Far
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity feature provides an audible and/or visual warning to potential forward collisions. The feature can be set to Far or Near. The default
status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away.
This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision
when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking — If Equipped
Low Medium High
NOTE:
The FCW Active Braking setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 MULTIMEDIA
Electric Power Steering Default— If
Equipped
Sport Normal Comfort
NOTE:
When "Electric Power Steering Default" is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to either Normal, Sport, or Comfort.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display.
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
NOTE:
The Rear ParkSense Volume settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display or Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include
Low, Medium, and High. The factory default volume setting is Medium. To make your selection, press the Rear ParkSense Volume button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist— If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
MULTIMEDIA 309
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as
sounds an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not oper-
ating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView
Backup camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into “PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay, press the Controls button on the touchscreen,
the Settings button on the touchscreen, then the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the wind-
shield.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 60
30 90
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 60
30 90
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchase.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
MULTIMEDIA 311
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Steering Directed Lights On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or
without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks All Driver
NOTE:
This feature allows you to program your remote door locks to open “All” doors or only the “Driver” door with the first push of the key fob or grabbing
the Passive Entry door handle.
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the
doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Personal Settings Linked To Key
Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position and radio
station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to on) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat
& Heated Steering Wheel — If
Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 60
30 90
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
MULTIMEDIA 313
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec 5 mins
45 sec 10 mins
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof
(if equipped), and power outlets remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door cancels this feature.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer + -
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – buttons on the touchscreen or
by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
Balance/Fade Arrow Buttons C icon
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker Icon or use the Arrows to adjust, tap the
C icon to readjust to the center.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the
Speed Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen and select from Off, 1, 2 or 3 buttons on the touchscreen.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button on the touch-
screen, and select On or Off.
AUX Volume Offset — If
Equipped
+ –
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selec-
tion, press the AUX Volume Offset button on the touchscreen, select + and –.
Auto Play — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your selection, press the On or Off buttons
to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press Do Not Disturb to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
MULTIMEDIA 315
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Paired Phones/Devices List of Paired Phones/Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Mode” in the “Uconnect 4 with
7-inch Display” section.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip Name of Channel
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you
would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected,
a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” Select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order Ok Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings
button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
Restore Apps Ok Cancel
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Clock, Audio, Radio, Bluetooth® devices, Apps, and Favor-
ites.
Modem Reset Ok Cancel
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking
"Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode,
the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped
such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock
& Date, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirrors &
Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
Comfort Systems, Key Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth® Settings, SiriusXM® Setup,
Reset, and System Information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 317
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons
On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once
the setting is complete, press the X button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio,
along with the selectable options pertaining to
each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.fm Page 317
318 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights ON + –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights ON” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF + –
NOTE:
When in the “Display Brightness With Headlights OFF” display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from
(1–10) with the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be
in the "party" or "parade" position.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
MULTIMEDIA 319
Set Theme List Of Themes
NOTE:
When in the “Set Theme” display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touch-
screen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
AutoShow Smartphone Display Upon
Connection — If Equipped
On Off
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Controls Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed In
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster
display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measurement independently displayed in the instrument cluster display,
and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measurement are listed below:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these settings, press the
Custom bar. The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption
MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °F °C
Power — If Equipped hp (US) kW hp (UK)
Torque — If Equipped lb-ft Nm
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
MULTIMEDIA 321
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Sync Time With GPS” feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time.
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 MULTIMEDIA
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at, before the
system will warn you of a possible collision, based on the option selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will
give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned Off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning Active
Braking — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Active Braking” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
MULTIMEDIA 323
Electric Power Steering Default — If
Equipped
Sport Normal Comfort
NOTE:
When "Electric Power Steering Default" is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to either normal, sport, or comfort.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display.
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
NOTE:
The “Rear ParkSense Volume” settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display or Uconnect System. The chime volume settings include
Low, Medium, and High. The factory default volume setting is Medium. To make your selection, press the Rear ParkSense Volume button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state through ignition cycles.
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects in your blind spot. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors. When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, BSM will show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors as well as
sound an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system is deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not oper-
ating to specification.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirror and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active.
Paddle Shifters On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the wind-
shield.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 30 60 90
Headlight Illumination On
Approach
0 30 60 90
Headlights With Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
MULTIMEDIA 325
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Auto Dim High Beams — If
Equipped
On Off
Daytime Running Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchase.
Steering Directed Lights — If
Equipped
On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
Auto Unlocks On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlocks On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position
and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob, or when using
the passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 MULTIMEDIA
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If
Equipped
On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door unlocks with the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, all
doors unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more than once results in only the driver’s door opening.
If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
Personal Settings Linked To Key
Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, power steering column position
and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
MULTIMEDIA 327
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat
& Heated Steering Wheel
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
Key Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 mins 10 mins
NOTE:
When the “Key Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if
equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. To change the Key Off Power Delay setting, press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes.”
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting
the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status press the + or – button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade “Speaker” Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker Icon, use the arrows to adjust, or tap
the Speaker icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
The “Equalizer” feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touch-
screen or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen.
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the Off,
1, 2, or 3 button on the touchscreen.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
MULTIMEDIA 329
Phone/Bluetooth® Settings
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button on the touch-
screen, select “On” or “Off.”
AUX Volume Offset — If
Equipped
-3 +3
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selec-
tion, press the AUX Volume Match button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your selection, press the On or Off
buttons to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Paired Phones and Audio Sources List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Sources” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
NOTE:
Pressing “Smartphone Projection Manager” feature allows you to see a list of all connected phones and gives you the option to determine which phone
will be used for projection (Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto™).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip Name of Channel
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to skip channels. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you
would like to skip.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
MULTIMEDIA 331
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default OK Cancel
Restore Apps OK Cancel
Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all of the radio features to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 MULTIMEDIA
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel X
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the
Clear Personal Data button and a pop-up will appear asking “Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?”
Modem Reset OK Cancel
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version. You
can also update your maps with a USB device. Please see an authorized dealer for further information.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
MULTIMEDIA 333
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual care-
fully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touch-
screen.
Please read and follow these safety precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result in injury or
property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal wire-
less radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 MULTIMEDIA
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1. Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen
to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes; AM, FM, and SXM can be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons on
the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2. Media
Press the Media button on the touchscreen
to access media sources such as USB De-
vice, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the re-
quested media is present.
3. Climate
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further details.
4. Apps
Press the Apps button on the touchscreen
to access Smartphone and Connected vehi-
cle options.
5. Controls
Press the Controls button on the touch-
screen to adjust the heated and vented
seats or heated steering wheel (If
Equipped).
6. Phone
Press the Phone button on the touchscreen
to access the Uconnect Phone feature.
7. Settings
Press the Settings button on the touch-
screen to access the Uconnect Settings
menu.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
MULTIMEDIA 335
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
onto the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Radio Mode
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen,
bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in the Radio mode.
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
the screen and mute the radio. Push the
Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns continu-
ously (360 degrees) in either direction, without
stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control
knob clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clock-
wise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right,
provides a means to close the Direct Tune
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left Steering
Wheel Audio Control up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel. During a Seek Up func-
tion, if the radio reaches the starting station
after passing through the entire band two times,
the radio will stop at the station where it began.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 MULTIMEDIA
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel. During a Seek Down
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen
located at the bottom of the radio screen. The
Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is avail-
able in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and can
be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become deacti-
vated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
bottom left on the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press the OK button, and the Direct
Tune screen will close. The system will automat-
ically tune to that station.
The selected Station or Channel number is
displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the six
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen.
You can switch between the two radio presets
by pressing the Arrow button located in the
upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset and returns to the main
radio screen.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
MULTIMEDIA 337
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by
pressing the X button on the touchscreen when
in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satel-
lite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content. Siri-
usXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a
one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access
package, providing over 160 channels of the
best programming for all the places life takes
you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel
available on your radio, including all the
premium programming like Howard Stern,
every NFL® game, every MLB® game, every
NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
subscription included with the All Access trial,
you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer,
smartphone, or tablet. Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
Latino – a collection of Spanish-language
channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize
your favorite music channels
Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more infor-
mation.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automat-
ically renew and bill at then-current rates until
you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel.
See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All fees
and programming subject to change. Our satel-
lite service is available only to those at least
18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C.
Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also available
in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satel-
lite service area and in AK. © 2019 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Service available in Canada; see www.siri-
usxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Pre-View channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call:
1-877-438-9677
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets
Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see
Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather Jump, and fav button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen, any time during the Replay
mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touch-
screen to pause the playing of live or rewound
content at any time. Play can be resumed again
by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done
when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, can not be done for live content. A
continuous press of the FW button on the touch-
screen also forwards the content. The Radio
begins playing the content at the point at which
the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume playing of Live content.
Favorites
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate the favorites menu, which will time out in
five seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X in the top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist, or song that is currently playing.
The Radio then uses this information to alert
you when either the favorite song, or favorite
artist are being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
MULTIMEDIA 339
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back Arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse
Screen.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
display a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the
Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
and down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio
screen.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-
screen to delete all of the Favorites or press the
Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual
alert when one of your favorites is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 MULTIMEDIA
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the selec-
tion, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the touch-
screen to activate the League Scroll list. Press
the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams
within the league will appear, then you can
select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that
are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-
screen to delete all of the Selections or press
the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
main menu or within the Settings main menu, to
activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto
Play, and Radio Off With Door.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the X located at the top right.
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the touch-
screen to Balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear
and front speakers.
Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons
or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
MULTIMEDIA 341
Equalizer
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to activate the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and
dragging over the level bar for each of the equal-
izer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the
bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
Volume screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increase to compensate
for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the On button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate Surround Sound. Press Off to deactivate
this feature.
When Surround Sound is On, you can hear
audio coming from every direction as in a movie
theatre or home theatre system.
Surround Sound
Loudness
Loudness
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 MULTIMEDIA
Press the On button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this
feature.
When Loudness is On, the sound quality at
lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
of the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
Auto Play
Auto Play
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen
to activate the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings On and
Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play
from a connected device, immediately after it is
connect to the radio.
Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door
Press the Radio Off With Door button on the
touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door
screen.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when acti-
vated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened, or when the Radio
Off Delay selected time has expired.
Media Mode
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB device or iPod® and cable into the USB
Port or by pressing the Select Source button on
the left side of the display, and then selecting
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
MULTIMEDIA 343
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection or to return to
the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device/iPod® is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
display the browse window. The left side of the
browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse
window shows items and its sub-functions,
which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
is active. Press the Repeat button on the touch-
screen a second time to turn this feature off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in
random order to provide an interesting change
of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touch-
screen a second time to turn this feature off.
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When
in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start
playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch
to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 MULTIMEDIA
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Blue-
tooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communi-
cate with the Uconnect System.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect
Phone section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select
Source button on the left side of the display,
and then select Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® Mode
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature,
press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop up is displayed will close the pop
up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® — If
Equipped
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto™ features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
MULTIMEDIA 345
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop™ or
higher powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touch-
screen to control many of your apps. To use
Android Auto™, follow the following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in your
vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app was not
downloaded, the first time you plug your
device in, the app will begin to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™
3. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, the “Phone” icon on the drag & drop
menu bar changes to the Android Auto™
Icon. Android Auto™ should launch, but if it
does not, refer to “Android Auto™ And Apple
CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this section for
the procedure to enable the feature “Auto-
Show”. You can also launch it by touching
the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Handsfree Calling and Texting for communi-
cation
Hundred of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
Signal Strength
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto™ Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US Residents) https:/
/www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto (Canadian
Residents).
For further information on the navigation func-
tion, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Android Auto™ Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Music
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
MULTIMEDIA 347
Android Auto™ Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto™.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.
Contacts
Call In Progress
Android Auto™ Apps
The Android Auto™ App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with Android Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Apple CarPlay® Integration
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the “Phone” icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon. Apple
CarPlay® should launch, but if not, refer to
“Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks” in this section for the procedure to
enable the feature “AutoShow”. You can also
touch the Apple CarPlay® icon on the touch-
screen to launch it.
Apple CarPlay®
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 MULTIMEDIA
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Apple CarPlay® Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold the Home
button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to
Siri. This allows you to make calls or listen to
voice mail as you normally would using Siri on
your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes®. Using your iPhone’s®
data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music, news,
sports, podcasts and more.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® Messages
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply
to text messages. Siri can also read
incoming text messages, but driver’s
will not be able to read messages, as everything
is done via voice.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
To use your Apple® Maps for naviga-
tion on your Uconnect system, launch
Apple CarPlay®, and push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
use Siri to set your desired destination. Alterna-
tively, choose a nearby destination by pressing
Destinations and selecting a category, by
launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
MULTIMEDIA 349
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held,
and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR
prompts you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple CarPlay® Apps
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically begins playing music off of
the connected device, as soon as it is
connected. This feature can be turned on or off
in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
NOTE:
AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto™.
AutoShow
AutoShow is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically launches and displays
Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® when the
phone is initially connected to the USB media
port. This feature can be turned on and off in
the Uconnect Settings, within the Display
Settings category. The default setting is on.
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first
time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone will automatically pair to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with
Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and
USB connections to function, and the
connected device will be unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is
connected to a media USB, and there is
another device plugged in, you will need to
manually change the configuration of the
USB connection in order for the Samsung
device to send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will
be unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay® are in use.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features:
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text to speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-free text message reply. (Forward one
of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
View call logs on screen (“Show incoming
calls,” “Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed
Calls,” “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided
throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the
Voice Command Quick Reference Section.
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the main phone
screen.
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listen to music on your Bluetooth® device
via the touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on
Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all
mobile phones [requires Bluetooth® Message Ac-
cess Profile (MAP) profile]
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
MULTIMEDIA 351
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call:
800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been
paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The
Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones
or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing
calls, view phonebook etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call and you want to
send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect
Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
vehicle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contact”
and when asked “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word utter-
ances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The
system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system iden-
tifies the topic or context and provides the asso-
ciated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you
want to call?” in the case where a phone call
was requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the
system requires more information from the user
it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if
active) on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel when
the system is listening for a command and be
returned to the main or previous menu.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
MULTIMEDIA 353
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth®-enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
If No is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Set-
tings button from the Uconnect Phone main
screen.
Select “Paired Phones”, and then press
the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN number.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 MULTIMEDIA
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will recon-
nect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
3. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the touch-
screen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touch-
screen to display the Paired Audio Devices
screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, enter the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
MULTIMEDIA 355
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or Audio Device follow these
steps:
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Sources button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the
particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will
appear, press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
Phone or Audio Device than the currently
connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Delete Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 MULTIMEDIA
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically down-
loads names (text names) and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access
Profile may support this feature.
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phone book, follow the procedure in the
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
section.
Automatic download and update of a phone
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the down arrow symbol button next to the
selected number to display the options
pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to Favor-
ites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your favor-
ites. This will bring up the options for that
favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are avail-
able and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
MULTIMEDIA 357
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
phone call with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
associated with John Doe, or if there are
multiple numbers it will ask which number
you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touch-
screens to enter the number and press
“Call.”
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the
steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone
End) press the “VR” button to send a touch-tone
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 MULTIMEDIA
These can be accessed by pressing the recent
calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and say “Show my incoming
calls” from any screen and the incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent”, or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the Answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID
box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold button on
the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls”
in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
“Join Calls” in this section.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
MULTIMEDIA 359
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Phone End button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least
½-inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 MULTIMEDIA
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recog-
nition rate is optimized when the entries are not
similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0”
(zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connec-
tion to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least
15 seconds prior to using the system.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
MULTIMEDIA 361
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push-button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SAT/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push-button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
NOTE:
While In Media Mode, the center button on the
left rocker switch is nonfunctional.
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB
device to be plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped
Located in the front storage area of the center
console, this feature allows an iPod®/MP3
player, or an external USB device, to be
connected to the audio system.
USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB 1 Port
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB 2 Port
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 MULTIMEDIA
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, iPod
nano®, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some
iPod® software versions may not fully support
the iPod® control features. Please visit
Apple’s® website for software updates.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This condi-
tion may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wire-
less radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further
from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
MULTIMEDIA 363
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
NOTE:
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in
the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 MULTIMEDIA
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The micro-
phones are located in the vehicle headliner
above the driver and front passenger.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button and say, “Help”. The system provides
you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary ports (if equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Voice Com-
mands
3 — Push To End Call
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
MULTIMEDIA 365
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song, and genre information is
displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
tions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button and say “Call”, then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book. When a contact has multiple
phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith
work.”
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if
enabled) and say “Listen.” (Must have compat-
ible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the VR button
or Phone button
(if enabled). After the beep, say: “Reply
.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 MULTIMEDIA
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of
the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used
to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800
Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button .
After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop.”
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
MULTIMEDIA 367
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recogni-
tion system, and use your smartphone’s data
plan to project your Android™-powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold
the Microphone icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touch-
screen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to
one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps (if equipped)
Additional Apps (if equipped)
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment for further information.
9
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. Siri-
usXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com
or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/
guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
369
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss addi-
tional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service
history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
10
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 423-6343
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
Contract National Customer Hotline at
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's
service contract. It is not responsible for any
service contract other than the manufacturer's
service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's service
contract, and you require service after the
manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 371
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga-
tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or
go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble-
shooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix prob-
lems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and
correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
To access your Owner’s Information online, visit
www.mopar.com
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Informa-
tion, call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
373
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................151 , 287
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) 166
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............261
Adding Washing Fluid .............................249
Additives, Fuel ......................................290
Adjust
Forward
.......................................28 , 30
Rearward .....................................28 , 30
Air Bag ................................................121
Advance Front Air Bag .........................121
Air Bag Operation ...............................122
Air Bag Warning Light ..........................120
Enhanced Accident Response .......127, 233
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...................233
Front Air Bag .....................................121
If Deployment Occurs ..........................126
Knee Impact Bolsters ..........................123
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............127
Maintenance .....................................127
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...........121
Side Air Bags .....................................123
Transporting Pets ...............................142
Air Bag Light ........................... 82 , 120, 143
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) 254
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................254
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ............... 254 , 255
Air Conditioner System ............................ 254
Air Conditioning ................................. 45 , 51
Air Conditioning Filter ....................... 53 , 255
Air Conditioning System ............................ 45
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..................52
Air Filter ..............................................254
Air Pressure
Tires ............................................... 273
Alarm
Arm The System ............................ 22 , 23
Panic ................................................13
Rearm The System ............................... 23
Security Alarm ............................... 22 , 83
Alarm System
Security Alarm ..................................... 22
All Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................. 265
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
................................................9
Android Auto ........................................ 367
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 260, 293, 294
Disposal .......................................... 262
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 92
Anti-Lock Warning Light ............................. 87
Apple CarPlay .......................................367
Arming System
Security Alarm .................................... 22
Assist, Hill Start ...................................... 97
Audio Settings ...................................... 340
Audio Systems (Radio) ............................ 301
Auto Down Power Windows ........................ 54
Automatic Door Locks ........................ 27 , 28
Automatic Headlights ............................... 40
Automatic High Beams ............................. 39
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......... 51
Automatic Transmission ......................... 157
Adding Fluid ......265, 295, 297, 298, 300
Fluid And Filter Change ....................... 265
Fluid Change .................................... 265
Fluid Level Check ...................... 264 , 265
Fluid Type .........264 , 295, 297, 298, 300
Special Additives ............................... 265
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 27,
160
AutoPark ............................................. 148
Autostick
Operation ........................................ 161
Aux Mode ............................................ 343
Axle Fluid .....................295 , 297, 298, 300
Axle Lubrication .............295 , 297, 298, 300
11
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374
B
Back-Up
...............................................182
Battery ..........................................83 , 250
Charging System Light ...........................83
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ................13
Location...........................................250
Belts, Seat ...........................................143
Blind Spot Monitoring ...............................99
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
.....359
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Au-
dio Device After Pairing
....................355
Bluetooth Mode .....................................344
Body Mechanism Lubrication ....................257
B-Pillar Location ....................................270
Brake Assist System .................................93
Brake Control System ...............................93
Brake Fluid........... 263 , 295, 297, 298, 300
Brake System ...............................263 , 287
Fluid Check ....... 263, 295, 297, 298, 300
Master Cylinder .................................263
Parking ............................................151
Warning Light ..............................82 , 287
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................156
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ....150
Brightness, Interior Lights ..........................42
Bulb Replacement .................................199
Bulbs, Light ..................................144 , 199
C
Camera, Rear ....................................... 182
Capacities, Fluid ............................ 293 , 294
Caps, Filler
Fuel
................................................183
Oil (Engine) ............................... 245 , 252
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................. 261
Car Washes.......................................... 284
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 142 , 292
Cargo
Vehicle Loading
................................. 184
Cellular Phone ...................................... 362
Certification Label ................................. 184
Chains, Tire .................................. 280 , 281
Changing A Flat Tire ............................... 266
Chart, Tire Sizing ................................... 267
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)
90
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............. 142
Checks, Safety ...................................... 142
Child Restraint ...................................... 128
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
................................... 131
Child Seat Installation ......................... 140
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 137
Infant And Child Restraints ................... 130
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 133
Older Children And Child Restraints ........ 131
Seating Positions ............................... 132
Clean Air Gasoline ................................. 290
Cleaning
Wheels............................................ 279
Climate Control ....................................... 44
Cold Weather Operation .......................... 149
Compact Spare Tire ............................... 278
Contract, Service ................................... 370
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ......... 261
Cooling System ..................................... 260
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 261
Coolant Level ............................ 260 , 262
Cooling Capacity ........................ 293 , 294
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................... 262
Drain, Flush, And Refill ........................ 260
Inspection ........................................ 262
Points To Remember .......................... 262
Pressure Cap .................................... 261
Radiator Cap .................................... 261
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .. 260, 293,
294, 295, 298
Corrosion Protection .............................. 284
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......... 164, 166
Cruise Light ..................................... 88 , 89
Customer Assistance ............................. 369
Customer Programmable Features ............ 302
Cybersecurity ....................................... 301
D
Daytime Running Lights ............................ 39
Dealer Service ...................................... 250
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
375
Deck Lid
Power Release
....................................57
Defroster, Windshield .............................143
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ........................43
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................89
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...........................................39
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .......................................249
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..........................232
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................262
Disturb ................................................358
Do Not Disturb ......................................366
Door Ajar ...............................................84
Door Ajar Light ........................................84
Door Locks
Automatic
...........................................28
Door Opener, Garage ................................58
Doors....................................................23
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ...............................28
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water
..........................................193
E
Electric Brake Control System
.....................93
Anti-Lock Brake System .........................92
Electronic Roll Mitigation ..................94 , 99
Electric Remote Mirrors .............................38
Electrical Power Outlets ............................ 64
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 203
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ....164
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................. 94
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ....... 83
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................. 231
Jacking .................................... 210 , 266
Jump Starting ........................... 227 , 228
Towing ............................................ 232
Emission Control System Maintenance ......... 90
Engine .........................245 , 246, 247, 248
Air Cleaner ....................................... 254
Block Heater .................................... 150
Break-In Recommendations ................. 150
Checking Oil Level ............................. 249
Compartment ................... 245 , 246, 248
Compartment Identification ......... 245, 247
Coolant (Antifreeze) ............ 260 , 295, 298
Cooling............................................ 260
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 142 , 292
Fails To Start .................................... 149
Flooded, Starting ............................... 149
Fuel Requirements ............................ 289
Jump Starting ........................... 227 , 228
Oil...................251 , 293, 294, 295, 298
Oil Filler Cap ............................. 245 , 252
Oil Filter .......................................... 253
Oil Selection ..................... 251 , 293, 294
Oil Synthetic ..................................... 252
Overheating ..................................... 229
Starting ................................... 146 , 147
Engine Oil Viscosity ........................ 251 , 252
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ........................ 251
Enhanced Accident Response Feature 127, 233
Ethanol ............................................... 291
Exhaust Gas Cautions .................... 142 , 292
Exhaust System ............................ 142 , 258
Exterior Lighting ...................................... 39
Exterior Lights ................................ 39 , 144
11
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376
F
Filler Location Fuel
.................................183
Filters
Air Cleaner ........................................254
Air Conditioning ...........................53 , 255
Engine Oil ......................... 253 , 295, 298
Engine Oil Disposal .............................253
Flashers ..............................................194
Hazard Warning .................................194
Turn Signals .......................... 41 , 88, 144
Flash-To-Pass .........................................40
Flooded Engine Starting ..........................149
Fluid Capacities .............................293 , 294
Fluid Leaks ..........................................144
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
..............................................263
Cooling System ..................................260
Engine Oil .........................................249
Transfer Case ....................................265
Fluid, Brake .................. 295 , 297, 298, 300
Fluids And Lubricants .....................295 , 298
Fog Lights ..............................................41
Fold-Flat Seats ..................................28 , 29
Forward Collision Warning ........................104
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...........................231
Fuel ................................................... 289
Additives .......................................... 290
Clean Air .......................................... 290
Ethanol............................................291
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............................ 183
Gasoline .......................................... 289
Materials Added ................................ 290
Methanol ......................................... 291
Octane Rating ................... 289 , 295, 298
Requirements ................................... 289
Specifications ........................... 295 , 298
Tank Capacity ........................... 293 , 294
Fueling................................................ 183
Fuses ................................................. 202
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
................. 58
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ......................... 183
Gasoline, Clean Air ................................. 290
Gasoline, Reformulated .......................... 290
Gear Ranges ........................................ 158
Glass Cleaning ...................................... 286
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................. 185 , 186
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............ 185 , 186
GVWR ................................................. 185
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.............................. 193
Hazard Warning Flashers ........................ 194
Head Restraints ...................................... 33
Head Rests ............................................ 33
Headlights
Automatic
.......................................... 40
Cleaning .......................................... 284
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........ 39
Lights On Reminder .............................. 41
On With Wipers ................................... 40
Passing ............................................. 40
Switch............................................... 39
Time Delay ......................................... 40
Washers .......................................... 249
Heated Mirrors ....................................... 38
Heater .................................................. 45
Heater, Engine Block .............................. 150
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch 39
Hill Start Assist ....................................... 97
Hitches
Trailer Towing
................................... 187
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ................ 58
Hood Prop ............................................. 56
Hood Release ......................................... 56
I
Ignition ................................................. 16
Switch............................................... 16
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide
............................... 10
Information Center, Vehicle ....................... 73
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
377
Inside Rearview Mirror
......................37 , 194
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
............................ 67 , 70, 88
Display ........................................72 , 75
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................286
Interior Appearance Care .........................285
Interior Lights .........................................41
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...............43
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ...................342 , 361
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...................361
J
Jack Location
........................................210
Jack Operation ..............................211 , 266
Jacking Instructions ................................211
Jump Starting ...............................227 , 228
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
...................................22
Panic Alarm ........................................13
Programming Additional Key Fobs ......15, 21
Unlatch The Trunk ................................12
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ..
13
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) 15
Key-In Reminder ......................................17
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..................................24
Enter The Trunk ...................................12
Keys ..................................................... 11
Replacement ................................ 15 , 21
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
................... 41
Lane Change Assist .................................. 41
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................114
Latches ............................................... 144
Hood................................................. 56
Lead Free Gasoline ................................289
Leaks, Fluid .........................................144
Life Of Tires .......................................... 276
Light Bulbs................................... 144 , 199
11
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378
Lights
..................................................144
Air Bag............................... 82 , 120, 143
Automatic Headlights ............................40
Brake Assist Warning ............................97
Brake Warning .............................82 , 287
Bulb Replacement ..............................199
Courtesy/Reading ................................42
Cruise..........................................88 , 89
Daytime Running .................................39
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ......................39
Electronic Stability Program(ESP) Indicator .....83
Exterior ......................................39 , 144
Fog ...................................................41
Headlight Switch ..................................39
Headlights ....................................39 , 41
Headlights On With Wipers .....................40
High Beam .........................................39
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................39
Instrument Cluster ................................39
Intensity Control ...................................42
Interior ..............................................41
License ............................................202
Lights On Reminder ..............................41
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........84
Map ..................................................42
Park ............................................40 , 88
Passing..............................................40
Reading .............................................42
Seat Belt Reminder ..............................81
Security Alarm .....................................83
Service ............................................ 199
Traction Control ................................... 97
Turn Signals ................... 39 , 41, 88, 144
Vanity Mirror .......................................38
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
.............................. 83 , 88
Load Shed Battery Saver On ...................... 80
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ...........80
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 80
Loading Vehicle ............................. 184 , 185
Capacities ........................................ 185
Tires ............................................... 270
Locks
Auto Unlock ........................................ 27
Automatic Door ................................... 28
Power Door ........................................ 24
Low Tire Pressure System ........................ 106
Lubrication, Body .................................. 257
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..................................... 287
M
Maintenance
.......................................... 56
Maintenance Free Battery .......................250
Maintenance Schedule ... 234, 235, 239, 240
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) 84, 90
Manual
Backward
..................................... 28 , 29
Forward ....................................... 28 , 29
Park Release .................................... 230
Rearward ...........................................28
Service............................................ 371
Tilt ................................................... 29
Manual Transmission ............. 153 , 264, 265
Fluid Level Check ...................... 264 , 265
Map/Reading Lights ................................ 42
Methanol ............................................ 291
Mirrors ................................................. 37
Electric Powered .................................. 38
Electric Remote ................................... 38
Heated .............................................. 38
Outside ............................................. 37
Rearview ................................... 37 , 194
Vanity ............................................... 38
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
................................................ 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .................. 106
Mopar Parts ......................................... 371
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................... 39
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................... 150
O
Occupant Restraints .............................. 110
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ......289 , 295 , 298
Oil Change Indicator ................................ 74
Reset................................................ 74
Oil Filter, Change ................................... 253
Oil Filter, Selection ................................ 253
Oil Pressure Light .................................... 83
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
379
Oil, Engine
............................ 251 , 295, 298
Capacity ...................................293 , 294
Change Interval .................................251
Checking ..........................................249
Dipstick ...........................................249
Disposal...........................................253
Filter ............................... 253 , 295, 298
Filter Disposal ...................................253
Identification Logo ..............................251
Materials Added To .............................253
Pressure Warning Light ..........................83
Recommendation ............... 251 , 293, 294
Synthetic ..........................................252
Viscosity................... 251 , 252, 293, 294
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................89
Operating Precautions ..............................89
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
.............................8 , 371
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...........................37
Overheating, Engine ...............................229
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ................8
P
Paddle Shift Mode
.................................161
Paddle Shifters .....................................161
Paint Care ............................................284
Panic Alarm ............................................13
Parking Brake .......................................151
ParkSense System, Rear .........................178
Passenger Seat
Easy Entry .......................................... 33
Passing Light .......................................... 40
Performance .......................................... 76
Pets ................................................... 142
Pinch Protection ...................................... 55
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........ 270
Power
Brakes ............................................287
Deck Lid Release ................................. 57
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................... 206
Door Locks ......................................... 24
Mirrors .............................................. 38
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ............. 64
Seats ................................................ 30
Steering........................................... 163
Sunroof ............................................. 54
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............ 36
Windows ............................................ 53
Power Seats
Forward
............................................. 30
Lumbar ............................................. 30
Rearward ...........................................30
Power Steering Fluid ...... 295 , 297, 298, 300
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............117
Preparation For Jacking .......................... 211
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
........................................ 118
Programmable Features .......................... 302
R
Radial Ply Tires ..................................... 274
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ......... 261
Radio
Presets
........................................... 336
Radio Operation ............................ 335 , 362
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...................... 44
Rear Camera ........................................ 182
Rear ParkSense System ......................... 178
Rear Seats, Folding ................................. 29
Recreational Towing .............................. 192
Reformulated Gasoline ........................... 290
Refrigerant .......................................... 255
Release, Hood ........................................ 56
Reminder, Lights On ................................ 41
Reminder, Seat Belt ............................... 113
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm
.................................... 22
Panic Alarm ........................................ 13
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..... 15, 21
Unlatch The Trunk ............................... 12
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
........................ 19
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features
................................ 20 , 312
Uconnect Settings ........................ 20 , 312
Remote Trunk Release ............................. 57
Replacement Bulbs ............................... 199
Replacement Keys ............................ 15 , 21
Replacement Tires ................................ 276
11
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380
Reporting Safety Defects
.........................371
Restraints, Child ....................................128
Restraints, Head ......................................33
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ....................231
Rotation, Tires ..............................281 , 282
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
....................143
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................144
Safety Defects, Reporting ........................371
Safety Information, Tire ...........................266
Safety Tips ...........................................142
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...............................142
Schedule, Maintenance ...........234 , 235, 239
Seat Belt Reminder ..................................81
Seat Belts ....................................111 , 143
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .........118
Child Restraints .................................128
Energy Management Feature ................118
Extender ..........................................117
Front Seat ........................ 111 , 114, 116
Inspection ........................................143
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................116
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................117
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............................114
Operating Instructions .........................116
Pregnant Women ...............................117
Pretensioners ....................................118
Rear Seat .........................................114
Reminder .........................................113
Seat Belt Extender ............................. 117
Seat Belt Pretensioner ........................ 118
Untwisting Procedure .......................... 117
Seat Belts Maintenance .......................... 285
Seats.................................. 28 , 30, 31, 33
Adjustment ................................... 28 , 30
Head Restraints ..................................33
Heated .............................................. 31
Height Adjustment ............................... 30
Power ............................................... 30
Rear Folding ................................. 28 , 29
Seatback Release .......................... 28 , 29
Tilting.................................... 28 , 30, 33
Vented ..............................................31
Ventilated .......................................... 31
Security Alarm .................................. 22 , 83
Arm The System .................................. 22
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ....... 295, 298
Sentry Key
Key Programming
................................ 21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ........................... 20
Sentry Key Replacement ..................... 15 , 21
Service Assistance ................................. 369
Service Contract .................................... 370
Service Manuals ................................... 371
Shift Indicator Light ................................ 155
Shifting ............................................... 155
Automatic Transmission .............. 155 , 157
Shoulder Belts ...................................... 114
Side View Mirror Adjustment ......................37
Signals, Turn ............................ 41 , 88, 144
Siri..................................................... 366
Sirius Satellite Radio .............................. 337
Favorites ......................................... 338
Replay ............................................ 338
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM .................................. 339
Favorites ......................................... 338
Replay ............................................ 338
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............... 280 , 281
Snow Tires........................................... 277
Spare Tires .......................... 210 , 278, 279
Spark Plugs ................................. 295 , 298
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
.......................... 295 , 298
Oil.......................................... 295 , 298
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
...................................... 165
Cancel ............................................ 166
Resume .......................................... 166
Set ................................................. 164
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......... 164, 166
Sport Mode.......................................... 163
Starting ...................................... 146 , 147
Automatic Transmission ...................... 146
Button .............................................. 16
Cold Weather .................................... 149
Engine Fails To Start ........................... 149
Starting And Operating ................... 146 , 147
Starting Procedures ....................... 146 , 147
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
381
Steering
................................................35
Column Lock .......................................35
Power ..............................................163
Tilt Column ...................................35 , 36
Wheel, Heated .....................................36
Wheel, Tilt ....................................35 , 36
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................361
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ....................................361
Storage .........................................63 , 283
Storage, Vehicle ..............................52 , 283
Store Radio Presets ................................336
Storing Your Vehicle ...............................283
Stuck, Freeing .......................................231
Sun Roof .........................................54 , 56
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag ....121
Synthetic Engine Oil ................................252
T
Telescoping Steering Column
................35 , 36
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........51
Tilt Steering Column ...........................35 , 36
Time Delay
Headlight
...........................................40
Tire And Loading Information Placard .........270
Tire Markings ........................................266
Tire Safety Information ............................266
Tire Service
Kit
..................... 215 , 216, 217, 218, 221,
222, 224, 226, 227
Tires ........................... 144 , 273, 278, 282
Aging (Life Of Tires) ............................ 276
Air Pressure ...................................... 273
Chains..................................... 280 , 281
Changing ................. 210 , 211, 215, 266
Compact Spare ................................. 278
Flat Changing .................................... 215
General Information ................... 273 , 278
High Speed....................................... 274
Inflation Pressure ............................... 273
Jacking .................................... 211 , 266
Life Of Tires ...................................... 276
Load Capacity ................................... 270
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...86 , 106
Quality Grading .................................. 282
Radial ............................................. 274
Replacement ............................ 215 , 276
Rotation .................................. 281 , 282
Safety ..................................... 266 , 273
Sizes............................................... 267
Snow Tires .......................................277
Spare Tires ....................... 210 , 278, 279
Spinning .......................................... 275
Trailer Towing ................................... 189
Tread Wear Indicators .........................275
Wheel Mounting ................................ 215
Wheel Nut Torque .............................. 287
To Open Hood ......................................... 56
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..................188
Towing................................................ 185
Disabled Vehicle ................................ 232
Guide.............................................. 188
Recreational ..................................... 192
Weight ............................................ 188
Towing Behind A Motorhome ................... 192
Traction .............................................. 192
Traction Control ...................................... 99
Trailer Towing ....................................... 185
Cooling System Tips ........................... 192
Hitches ........................................... 187
Minimum Requirements ...................... 189
Tips ................................................ 191
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................... 188
Wiring ............................................. 190
Trailer Towing Guide .............................. 188
Trailer Weight ....................................... 188
Transfer Case
Fluid ........................265 , 295, 297, 298
Maintenance .................................... 265
Transmission ....................................... 157
Automatic ........................ 155 , 157, 264
Fluid ........................295 , 297, 298, 300
Maintenance .................................... 264
Manual ........................................... 153
Shifting ........................................... 155
Transporting Pets .................................. 142
Tread Wear Indicators ............................ 275
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ................................. 57
Trunk Release Remote Control ................... 57
11
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382
Turn Signals
.....................................41 , 88
U
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity
...............359
Phone Call Features ............................356
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
.............................359
Uconnect Settings ............ 12 , 13, 20, 312
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display .................302
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display ..317
Uconnect Phone ............ 352 , 353, 354, 355
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Cur-
rently In Progress ............................358
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No
Call Currently In Progress ..................358
Bluetooth Communication Link ..............360
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name .........357
Call Continuation ................................359
Call Controls .....................................357
Call Termination .................................359
Cancel Command ...............................352
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
The Uconnect Phone And Mobile
Phone
..........................................359
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
....355
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device ..........355
Dial By Saying A Number ......................357
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device ...355
Far End Audio Performance .................. 360
Help Command ................................. 352
Join Calls .........................................359
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite
.......................................355
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress....................................... 358
Managing Your Favorites ..................... 356
Natural Speech ................................. 352
Operation ......................................... 352
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone.......................................... 353
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device . 354
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ............... 354
Phonebook Download .........................356
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............ 358
Power-Up ......................................... 360
Recent Calls ..................................... 357
Redial ............................................. 359
To Remove A Favorite ......................... 356
Toggling Between Calls ........................ 359
Touch-Tone Number Entry .................... 357
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone . 359
Voice Command ................................359
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ................357
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .. 20, 312
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................... 282
Unleaded Gasoline ................................ 289
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................ 117
V
Vanity Mirrors
......................................... 38
Vehicle Certification Label ....................... 184
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 287
Vehicle Loading .................... 184 , 185, 270
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................. 9
Vehicle Security Alarm .............................. 22
Vehicle Storage .............................. 52 , 283
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help .................................... 10
Navigation ......................................... 10
Operating Instructions .......................... 10
Searching User Guide ........................... 10
Viscosity, Engine Oil ....................... 251 , 252
Voice Command .................................... 363
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................. 363
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
383
W
Warning Lights (Instrument
Cluster Descriptions)
................................85
Warnings And Cautions ...............................9
Warranty Information ..............................371
Washer
Adding Fluid ......................................249
Washers, Windshield ........................43 , 249
Washing Vehicle ....................................284
Water
Driving Through
.................................193
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ......................279
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ......................279
Wind Buffeting ..................................54 , 55
Window Fogging ......................................52
Windows ............................................... 53
Power ............................................... 53
Windshield Defroster .............................. 143
Windshield Washers ................................. 43
Fluid ............................................... 249
Windshield Wiper Blades ......................... 257
Windshield Wipers ................................... 43
Wipers Blade Replacement ...................... 257
Wipers, Intermittent ................................. 43
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .............................. 44
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
20_LA_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its
products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the rst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian
residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you nd yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Dodge brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source
for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local
Dodge brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use
public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING
20_LA_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
2020 DODGE CHALLENGER OWNER’S MANUAL
©2019 FCA US LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. TOUS DROITS RÉSERVÉS.
DODGE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF FCA US LLC OR FCA CANADA INC., USED UNDER LICENSE. DODGE EST UNE MARQUE DÉPOSÉE DE FCA US LLC OU FCA CANADA INC., UTILISÉE SOUS LE PERMIS.
APP STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF APPLE INC. GOOGLE PLAY STORE IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF GOOGLE.
Whether it’s providing information about specic product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an
accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll nd the app an important extension of your Dodge brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search
keyword “Dodge” (U.S. residents only).
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
2020 DODGE CHALLENGER
